JP6339797B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko machine.

Some conventional gaming machines, for example, slot machines, include a main reel having a plurality of reels capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols (identification information), and an effect display device (liquid crystal display device) (see Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2005-27707 A

However, in a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that an abnormality is likely to occur if a medal is inserted into the medal slot immediately before the game ends .

The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to suppress the occurrence of abnormality .

In an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, by performing an internal lottery prize combination based on the start operation including the bet number set to start the game for variably displaying a plurality of reels, a plurality of reels has been stopped based on the stop operation in the die roll is internally won the role possible gaming machine executes the addition processing for imparting game value becomes the stop outcome to establish the winning of capable of storing game mediums within the prescribed number and Do storage means, in response to execution of the application treatment, and a notification effect means capable of implementing the predetermined notification effect that can be recognized that the winning has been established, the application treatment, the pay A payout process for paying out game media corresponding to the game value from the exit; and a storage process for storing the number of game media corresponding to the game value in the storage means. The payout process or the above-mentioned The game includes a second role with a short execution period of processing and a re-gamer, and enters a return state in which game media inserted from the slot is returned in response to the start of the game, At any end of the automatic bet number setting corresponding to the winning of the game player, the game medium inserted from the insertion slot is brought into the take-in state, and the notification effecting means is configured to perform the payout process or the storage. the end timing of the notification effect in the case where the base point end timing of the processing, the end timing of the notification effect that started in response to the payout process or the storing process corresponding to the winning of the second roles, said first It was terminated after relatively than the end timing of the notification effect that started in response to the payout process or the storing process corresponding to the winning of 1 roles, and the take-shape from the return state Ru is terminated on or after that becomes a.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of abnormality .

It is a figure which shows the external appearance of the slot machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the structure inside the housing of the slot machine of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the front frame of the slot machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is the elements on the right side of the front panel of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a figure which shows the state which the sub indicator moved to the upper end position, (B) is a figure where the sub indicator is a lower end position. It is a figure which shows the state which moved to. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the movable production | presentation apparatus in the production | presentation space part R formed in the upper unit of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the medal path | route mechanism part provided in the back surface of the front door in the slot machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow-path switching mechanism (medal selector) of the medal path mechanism part of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is AA 'sectional drawing of the flow-path switching mechanism (medal selector) of 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure for demonstrating the switching function of the medal flow path by a flow-path switching member, (A) A take-in state for distributing medals to a collection rail and taking them in, (B) shows a return state (normal state, protruding state) in which medals are distributed to a return port. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a control system of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the reel with which the slot machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention is provided, (A) is an example of the arrangement | sequence of the symbol currently formed in the reel seal | sticker (sheet | seat) which comprises the outer peripheral surface of the reel with which a slot machine is equipped. , (B) shows a predetermined enabling line for a 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, symbol combination forms corresponding to each winning combination, and winning contents in the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention, (A) shows a state transition diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the game control device, (B ) Shows the breakdown of winning combinations in the winning winning determination table for each gaming state. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the transition of the game state in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal mode set in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the progress example of the game in the various cases of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game control process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the internal lottery process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the winning combination which can be overlapped of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a replay winning combination, (B) is a Bell A winning combination, (C) is a winning which can be overlapped with a Bell B winning combination. Show the role. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning determination process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the medal insertion error monitoring process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the situation where medal clogging occurs in a channel change mechanism (medal selector) in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation control process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the regular effect information setting process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the regular effect aspect determination table for determining the aspect of the regular effect of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the execution information storage area of the regular effect of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the regular production | presentation alerting | reporting information of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is regular production | presentation invalid alert | report information, (B) is a regular effect valid alert | report information. It is a figure which shows the content of the menu screen displayed on the sub-display of 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a display hierarchy. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the support menu process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the log | history display process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the history menu selection screen of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game number reset setting process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game state which can set reset information by normal reset and forced reset of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the setting reset cancellation | release process of the log | history display process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display with a subdisplay at the time of setting the reset information for performing the reset process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display with a sub display at the time of trying to set reset information in the game state which cannot set the reset information by normal reset of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display with a sub-display at the time of canceling | releasing the setting of reset information of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the portable interlocking | linkage process of the support menu process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the interlocking | linkage menu selection screen displayed on the sub-display of 1st Embodiment of this invention. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of operations of the slot machine and the external server when the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention receives the interlock start process and the interlock end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game number reset protection process in the portable interlocking | linkage process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed in the G number reset protection process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production customization process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the customization menu selection screen of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production customization process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the promotion effect setting screen of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game management information setting process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the first time mode determination table (at the time of reset) which prescribed | regulated the selection ratio of the internal mode about each setting value of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game management information setting process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. The specific gaming state is completed in the mode transition determination table in which the ratio between the internal mode set before the reset process of the first embodiment of the present invention and the internal mode set after the reset process is defined according to the set value. It is a figure which shows the content of the mode transfer determination table used when it does. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table | surface for determining the promotion mode in the pseudo | simulation bonus state of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pseudo | simulation bonus promotion lottery process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the continuous production | presentation control process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example when the next game is started after completion | finish of the notification effect of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows from the start to the end of a continuous effect, (B) is the last stage effect. Details are shown. It is a timing chart which shows the example when the next game is started before completion | finish of the hit notification effect of 1st Embodiment of this invention, a continuous effect is complete | finished, but a notification effect is not complete | finished. It is a timing chart which shows the example in case the next game is started before the end of the missed notification effect of the first embodiment of the present invention, and the continuous effect and the notification effect are ended. It is a transition diagram showing an example of a series of effects from the start of the continuous effect to the final stage effect of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation aspect from the last stage production of the continuous production of 1st Embodiment of this invention to the next game start, and is a figure explaining the case where the next game is started after completion | finish of notification production. It is a figure explaining the production | generation aspect from the last stage production of the continuous production of 1st Embodiment of this invention to the next game start, and the next game is started during execution of notification production, but the output of a specific result sound is in the middle It is a figure explaining the case where it does not complete | finish. It is a figure explaining the production | generation aspect from the last stage production of the continuous production of 1st Embodiment of this invention to the next game start, and the next game is started during execution of notification production, but the output of a specific result sound is in the middle It is a figure explaining the case where it does not complete | finish. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the definite effect after the end of the continuous production of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the case where the result of a continuous production is out of place, (B) is the case where the result of a continuous production is a specific result. Indicates. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation aspect from the last stage production of the continuous production of the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention to the next game start, and is a figure explaining the case where the next game is started during execution of a notification production. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pseudo | simulation bonus promotion effect control process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the promotion effect start process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the clear promotion effect process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal promotion effect process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ambiguous promotion effect process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which alert | reports the promotion lottery mode of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a normal promotion effect and an ambiguous promotion effect, (B) is a clear promotion effect in the case of a low promotion mode, ( C) shows a clear promotion effect in the high promotion mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which alert | reports the internal lottery result of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows a BAR bonus, (B) shows a normal bonus, (C) shows a super bonus. It is a figure explaining a series of effects in pseudo bonus promotion of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining a series of effects in pseudo bonus promotion of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 1st modification of a pseudo bonus promotion effect of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, and (A) is a figure showing an example of promotion of one step, and (B) is an example of promotion of two steps. . It is a figure explaining the 2nd modification of the promotion effect of the promotion lottery mode of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 2nd modification of the promotion effect of a pseudo bonus of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the additional suggestion alerting | reporting effect of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a normal position, (B) is an additional suggestion alerting | reporting operation | movement 1, (C) shows the additional suggestion alerting | reporting operation | movement 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of the extra notification production of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, (A) shows a one-shot low addition information operation, (B) shows a one-shot height addition information operation, and (C) shows a special addition information operation. . It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the paying-out alert | report control process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart explaining control at the time of paying out medals according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart explaining control at the time of paying out medals according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart explaining the control at the time of medal payout at the time of formation of the 1 sheet combination A or 1 sheet combination B of the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the external appearance of the slot machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of a part of the slot machine of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is sectional drawing in the horizontal direction of a part of slot machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the control system of the slot machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the arrangement | sequence diagram of the design of the reel with which the slot machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination in the slot machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination aspect corresponding to each winning combination, and winning content. The symbol formation line and effective line with respect to the 3 * 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window of 2nd Embodiment of this invention are shown. It is a figure which illustrates the game in ART state in the slot machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a state transition diagram of the gaming state in the slot machine of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game control process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning determination process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the replay information setting process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game state update process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the bonus end monitoring process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation control process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game end process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in ART of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process 1 in ART of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process 2 during ART of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the GBS determination process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main part of the GBS subtraction process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the GBS subtraction process in chance zone 4 (CZ4) among the GBS subtraction processes of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the continuous hit chance process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game chance process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the GBS maintenance process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the GBS light extinction process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the GBS value subtraction process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the GBS mode transfer process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The display mode of the G counter value display apparatus in the case of performing a freeze effect in 2nd Embodiment of this invention is shown. It is a partial schematic front view which shows the slot machine in which the bowl-shaped concealment member of 3rd Embodiment of this invention is used. It is a figure which shows the shutter-shaped concealment member of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which shows the slot machine in which the concealment member which conceals the counter value display part in 3rd Embodiment of this invention is used. It is a figure which shows the screen change of the image display apparatus when covered with the concealment member of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial schematic front view which shows the slot machine in which the small concealment member of 3rd Embodiment of this invention is used. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the horizontal direction of the slot machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial schematic front view which shows the slot machine in which the rotation concealment member of 3rd Embodiment of this invention is used. It is a partial schematic front view which shows the slot machine in which the expansion-contraction concealment member of 3rd Embodiment of this invention is used. It is a partial schematic front view which shows the slot machine in which the fixed concealment member of 3rd Embodiment of this invention is used. It is the schematic which shows the slot machine which has the reel fixed in the position which is not conspicuous of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the mode of the slot machine in the case of pressing down of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic which shows an example of the slot machine which has the movable reel of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic which shows the other example of the slot machine which has the movable reel of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic which shows the slot machine which has the movable mirror member of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic which shows the slot machine which has a camera of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which shows the slot machine of other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the movement of the operation order display part of other embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which shows the slot machine of further another embodiment of this invention.

(First embodiment)
FIG. 1 is a view showing an appearance of the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 1a whose front is open, and the front door 2 is connected to the front of the housing 1a via a hinge 2a (see FIG. 2). Is provided so as to be openable and closable in a left-right direction. At the upper part of the front door 2, a main display (image display device, display means) 3 for effecting display and information display according to the game, a speaker (upper speaker, lower speaker) 4 for effecting sound, and light A frame light-emitting device 7 (such as a pilot lamp 7a and an upper light-emitting decorative portion 7b) that performs an effect is provided.

  The main display 3 is composed of a liquid crystal display panel, for example, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. And various effect display in the main display 3 is controlled by the effect control apparatus 70 (refer FIG. 9). Further, the main display 3 is disposed at a position deeper than the speaker 4 and the frame light emitting device 7 so that a rectangular concave chamber is formed on the front side. This rectangular concave chamber has an opening formed on the front side, and has an effect space R inside thereof.

  On the back side of the left wall portion of the effect space portion R, a left movable effect device 360 is disposed. Further, a right movable effect device 370 is disposed on the back side of the right wall portion of the effect space R. The left movable effect device 360 and the right movable effect device 370 include a movable member, and the movable member of one or both of the movable effect devices is configured to be able to execute an effect of moving the effect space portion R. Yes.

  A front panel 9 is arranged at the center of the front door 2 so that the back cannot be visually recognized, and a decorative pattern or the like is drawn. The back of the front panel 9 is visible at the center (for example, A transparent symbol display window 9a is formed.

  Note that the front panel 9 may be configured by a display device, and the reel 6 can be visually recognized when no image is displayed on the symbol display window 9a, and an image that produces a game mainly around the symbol display window 9a. indicate. In this case, if the reel 6 is in a stopped state or a frozen state in which the reel 6 cannot be stopped, an image for producing a game can be displayed on the symbol display window 9a.

  Through the symbol display window 9a (window portion), the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner by the rotation of the reel 6 disposed in the housing 1a can be visually recognized. The reel 6 includes a cylindrical left reel 6a, a middle reel 6b, and a right reel 6c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A reel-shaped reel seal (sheet) 6d on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction is wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels (6a, 6b, 6c), so that a plurality of symbols are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement. Is arranged (see FIG. 10). Each reel (6a, 6b, 6c) is provided with reel motors 1 to 3 (64a, 64b, 64c (see FIG. 9)) as stepping motors, and each reel (6a, 6b, 6c) is provided. 6c) can be independently rotated and stopped. That is, the reel motors 1 to 3 (64a, 64b, 64c) serve as an electrical drive source for driving the reels (6a, 6b, 6c).

  By rotating the reel 6 by the reel motor 64, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 9a are varied so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 6 is stopped, for each reel (6a, 6b, 6c), a predetermined number (for example, three) of symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, is the symbol display window 9a. It is visible through

  In addition, a backlight 67 that irradiates light from the rear of the reel at a position on the back side of the reel 6 and behind each symbol stop position in the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 9a. (See FIG. 9). The reel 6 can transmit light, and an effect by light can be performed by changing the light irradiation mode by the backlight 67.

  At the lower part of the front panel 9, there is formed a game progress display window 9c through which the credit number display part 11, the game progress display part 12, the payout number display part 13, the game state display part 18 and the bet number display part 19 can be seen. Yes. Further, on the right side of the front panel 9, there is formed a liquid crystal display window 9d through which a sub-display (side sub-display device, display means) 310, a high probability mode display 320, a low probability mode display 330, etc. can be seen. ing.

  The credit number display unit 11 displays the number of medals stored as credits without being paid out by the medal payout device 63 (see FIG. 9). The game progress display unit 12 displays a game progress state. Further, the payout number display unit 13 displays the number of payouts at the time of winning. These display parts (11, 12, 13) are comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and display various information by the lighting state.

  The game state display unit 18 includes a replay display unit that indicates that a replay winning (replay winning) has been established and a replay game has been awarded, and until the reel 6 rotates after the player operates the start lever 21. A weight display section indicating that there is a waiting time (a state in which the reel 6 is waiting to start rotating because a certain time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game), and a standby in which the slot machine 1 can play a game It is composed of an insert medal display section that indicates a state and prompts a betting operation. The bet number display unit 19 displays the bet number.

  The sub display 310 is disposed in front of the high probability mode display 320 and the low probability mode display 330 and can move up and down. A lamp (not shown) is disposed behind the high probability mode indicator 320 and the low probability mode indicator 330, and the high probability mode indicator 320 and the low probability mode indicator 330 are emitted by causing the lamps to emit light. Can emit light indirectly. In addition, a frame light emitting device 7 (medium light emitting decorative portion 7c) that performs effects by light is provided on both sides of the front door 2.

  On the upper left side of the front panel 9, there is provided a betting number display portion 9e on which circle numbers 1 to 3 indicating the number of bets are drawn. A bet number display lamp (not shown) is disposed behind the bet number display unit 9e, and the predetermined bet number on the bet number display unit 9e is indirectly set by causing the bet number display lamp to emit light. Make it emit light. Also, at the lower left part of the front panel 9, there is provided a single notification display portion 9f on which a letter V surrounded by a polygon is drawn. A single notification lamp (not shown) is disposed behind the single notification display section 9f, and the single notification display section 9f is caused to emit light indirectly by causing the single notification lamp to emit light. This makes it possible to notify that the special winning combination has been won internally. Further, a touch suggestion display portion 9g on which characters of “touch” are drawn is provided below the one notification display portion 9f. An infrared switch 83 is disposed behind the touch suggestion display portion 9g, and it is possible to detect a hand that the player has deceived in the vicinity of the touch suggestion display portion 9g.

  A step portion protruding forward is formed below the front panel 9, and an upper surface of the step portion is an inclined base portion 14 that is inclined downward on the front side. This tilting base part 14 has a medal insertion slot 15, a max bet button 17 as a progress operating part for advancing the game, and an effect operation incorporating an effect button switch 10a for receiving an operation input from the player. There is provided an operation input unit 30 having a built-in effect button 10 and an operation input unit switch 30c for receiving an operation input from a player.

  The medal slot 15 is disposed on the right side (the open end side of the front door 2) when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1 in the inclined base part 14. When the player inserts a medal into the medal slot 15 and performs a betting operation, the game can be executed. A medal insertion detector 922 and a medal take-in detector 925 (see FIG. 9) for detecting the passage of medals are provided in a path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 pass. The number of medals inserted is counted based on information detected by the device 922 and the medal acquisition detector 925.

  The max bet button 17 is disposed on the left side of the inclined base portion 14 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1. The maximum bet button 17 can input from the credit to the upper limit number (for example, three) of the bet number by performing a pressing operation once. However, when the credit number is less than the upper limit number, the credit number is input as the bet number. It is like that. The effect button 10 is arranged at the center of the tilting base part 14, and the player's operation is caused to intervene in the effect display on the main display 3 or a sub-display 310 to be described later when operated by the player. Production is to be performed. The operation input unit 30 is disposed on the right side of the tilting base unit 14, and is operated by the player to select one item from the menu screen displayed on the sub-display 310 and to display a desired display (for example, Game history information, etc.).

  The operation input unit 30 includes selection buttons 30a,... Provided on the top, bottom, left, and right, and a determination button 30b provided in the center of each selection button 30a.

  A payout button 20, a start lever 21, a return button 22, a reel stop button 24, a keyhole 23, and the like are provided below the inclined base portion 14. The payout button 20 is a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 15, a medal input as a bet number by the max bet button 17 (a bet medal), or a medal that is paid out when a winning is established (stored as a credit). This is used when giving a command to return the medal to the tray 27. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 15 after an automatic betting operation based on establishment of a re-game prize (replay prize), or when a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits, a channel switching mechanism (medal selector, It is returned to the tray 27 via the medal sorting unit 93.

  The start lever 21 is an operation lever for making a progress operation unit for advancing the game and for starting a single game. The key hole 23 is for inserting a key when opening the front door 2 or resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 1. The return button 22 is used when a medal inserted from the medal slot 15 and clogged by the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 is returned to the tray 27.

  The reel stop button 24 forms a progress operation unit for advancing the game, and is provided with a left reel stop button 24a, a middle reel 6c, a left reel stop button 24a, a middle reel 6c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The reel stop button 24b and the right reel stop button 24c are configured to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels (6a, 6b, 6c) according to the stop operation. That is, it is provided corresponding to each reel 6 and serves as a stop operation unit that is operated by the player when the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped. These reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c) are formed of, for example, a colored translucent resin member. In the reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c), whether or not the corresponding reel 6 can be stopped by operating the reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c) is notified by the light emission mode. A stop button LED 66 (see FIG. 9) is provided.

  In addition, the reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c) have a greater repulsive force when the middle reel stop button 24b is pressed than the left reel stop button 24a, and further the right reel than the middle reel stop button 24b. The stop button 24c is provided so that the repulsive force when the button is pressed is increased. That is, the buttons are difficult to press in the order of left, middle, and right. Thereby, since it can be directed to operate from a button that is easy to push, so-called irregular pressing (a stop operation such as operating the middle or right button first) can be suppressed. Further, a button larger than the left reel stop button 24a and the middle reel stop button 24b is used for the right reel stop button 24c. Note that the repulsive force of each reel stop button may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the irregular pressing as described above is suppressed, while the specific gaming state (AT state, ART state) In the CT state, etc., the repulsive force of each reel stop button is made uniform to allow irregular pressing.

  In addition, a decorative panel unit 25 constituting a lower region of the front door 2 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, an ashtray 26, a tray 27 for storing medals, a medal payout port 28, a speaker 4 for outputting sound, and the like are provided below the decorative panel unit 25 and at the bottom of the front door 2. Yes.

  FIG. 2 is a view showing a structure inside the housing of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  A game control device 50 for controlling the entire slot machine 1 is disposed in the upper part inside the housing. In addition, a reel placement unit 29 is provided almost in the center of the housing, and a variable display device 600 having a rotatable reel (6a, 6b, 6c) is placed on the reel placement unit 29. Yes. The variable display device 600 of the present embodiment is located to the left of the position where it is normally arranged. This is because a space in which a sub-display 310 (described later) is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 600 is taken into consideration. An external signal output terminal 33 for outputting a signal from the game control device 50 to an external device is provided on the right side of the variable display device 600. The signal output from the external signal output terminal 33 is, for example, an out signal, a safe signal, a signal related to a bonus and replay, or the like.

  Further, on the right side of the game control device 50, a door open / close detection switch 62 for detecting the open / closed state of the front door 2, an upper lock mechanism 34a, and a lower lock mechanism 34b are provided, and on the left side of the game control device 50. Is provided with a hinge 2a as a rotation axis of the front door 2. In addition, opening cover members 37a and 37b that cover the holding openings provided on both side walls of the housing are provided immediately below the both sides of the reel mounting portion 29, and the front door 2 is provided in the vicinity of the opening cover member 37b. There is provided a weight support portion 38 for receiving the weight when closed.

  Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 63 is disposed at the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 63 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 and guided by the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93, and a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the active line to establish a prize. In this case, the number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the winning or the medal that exceeds the upper limit of the credit by the addition associated with the winning is received to the tray 27. The medal for the credit is paid out to the tray 27 by the medal payout device 63 by operating the payout button 20.

  On the right side of the medal payout device 63, the medal that overflows and flows in from the medal payout device 63 is stored, or the inward medal is guided to the medal recovery mechanism on the installation island where the slot machine 1 is installed. An overflow tank 69 is provided. Further, on the left side of the medal payout device 63, the power supply device 40 that supplies power to electronic devices such as motors and lamps that are operated by the control device and the control device and the winning probability of the slot machine 1 are displayed in any of six stages, for example. A setting device 60 for setting the crab is provided. A power switch 31 or the like is provided at a portion between the setting device 60 and the reels (6a, 6b, 6c).

  FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a front frame of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 shows the front door 2 with the light guide panel 223, the front panel 9, and the decorative panel unit 25 removed. As shown in FIG. 3, the front door 2 includes a door body unit 200, an upper unit 220 attached to the upper part of the door body unit 200, and a lower unit 240 attached to the lower part of the door body unit 200. I have.

  The door body unit 200 includes engagement hook members 210,... And engages with an upper lock mechanism 34a and a lower lock mechanism 34b disposed in the housing 1a, thereby closing the front opening of the housing 1a. It is supposed to be. Further, the door body unit 200 can be mounted with the decorative panel unit 25 above the mounting position of the lower unit 240. The decorative panel unit 25 includes a decorative panel 25a, a panel support frame 25b that supports the decorative panel 25a, and a fluorescent lamp 25c that indirectly causes the decorative panel 25a to emit light. Further, the door body unit 200 can be attached with the front panel 9 above the inclined base part 14.

  The upper unit 220 includes a main display 3, an effect control device 70, a pilot lamp 7a, an upper light emitting decoration 7b, an upper speaker 4, a light guide panel 223, a left movable effect device 360, and a right movable effect. An apparatus 370.

  The upper unit 220 includes a ceiling wall portion, a partition portion forming a bottom surface, a left side wall portion 221, and a right side wall portion 222 (see FIG. 5). It is arranged. By being configured in this manner, a rectangular concave chamber shape having a predetermined depth and opened to the front side is formed, and the effect space portion R is provided in the rectangular concave chamber.

  The left movable effect device 360 is disposed on the left side wall portion 221, and similarly, the right movable effect device 370 is disposed on the right wall portion 222 (see FIG. 5). The movable members (361, 371) provided in the left movable effect device 360 and the right movable effect device 370 operate in the effect space R to execute a predetermined effect.

  The light guide panel 223 is attached so as to close the front opening of the upper unit 220 and is disposed in front of the main display 3. In addition, the light guide panel 223 is a transparent acrylic plate, and normally, it is possible to visually recognize an effect display or the like by the main display 3 disposed behind the light guide panel 223. The light incident from the end face of the light is reflected in front of the light guide panel 223 by the character parts formed in the left region, the right region, and the central region of the light guide panel 223, thereby indirectly emitting the character part. It is possible.

  Further, although not shown, a light source is disposed along the upper end of the light guide panel 223, and light emitted from the light source is incident from a side portion (upper portion) of the light guide panel 223. It is possible to indirectly emit light from a character portion (light emitting region) formed on the light guide panel 223 by emitting the light from the front surface of the light guide panel. The light source provided along the upper end of the light guide panel 223 is a full color LED, and the character portions (light emitting regions) formed in the left region, the right region, and the central region can each emit light in full color. It has become.

  The lower unit 240 is a unit that constitutes the lowermost part of the front door 2, and includes an ashtray 26, a tray 27 for storing medals, a medal payout port 28, a lower speaker 4 for outputting sound, and a medal payout port. A payout notification lamp 16 for notifying medal payout is provided.

  FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of the right side of the front panel 9 according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure which shows the state which the sub indicator 310 moved to the upper end position, (B) is a figure which shows the state which the sub indicator 310 moved to the lower end position.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, when the sub display 310 is moved from the normal position to the upper end position, the first “CHANCE” characters that have been hidden behind the sub display 310 until then are drawn. The expectation level display part 340 becomes visible. At this time, the second expectation level display unit 350 remains shielded.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the sub-display 310 is moved from the normal position to the lower end position, the character “Hatsuatsu” that has been hidden behind the sub-display 310 until then is drawn. Further, the second expectation level display unit 350 can be visually recognized. At this time, the first expectation level display unit 340 remains shielded.

  As with the high probability mode display 320 and the low probability mode display 330, the first expectation level display unit 340 and the second expectation level display unit 350 are provided with a lamp (not shown) at the rear. By emitting light, the first expectation degree display unit 340 and the second expectation degree display unit 350 can be caused to emit light indirectly.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable effect device (360, 370) in the effect space R formed in the upper unit 220 according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is an effect produced by the left movable effect device 360, (B) is an effect produced by the right movable effect device 370, and (C) is an illustration explaining an effect produced by the operations of the left movable effect device 360 and the right movable effect device 370.

  The left movable effect device 360 is disposed on the back side of the left wall portion 221 of the upper unit 220, and the right movable effect device 370 is disposed on the back surface side of the right wall portion 222 of the upper unit 220.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the left movable effect device 360 starts to produce, the left movable member 361 attached to the support member 362 is moved from the back side (standby space) of the left wall portion 221. It moves toward the center of the production space R. The left movable member 361 incorporates a light emitting member such as an LED, and is configured to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the reliability of the variable display game. The reliability of the variable display game may display a corresponding message or may correspond to the light emission mode of the light emitting member.

  Also, the right movable effect device 370 is configured in the same manner as the left movable effect device 360, and when the effect by the right movable effect device 370 is started as shown in FIG. The right movable member 371 attached to the member 372 moves from the back side (standby space) of the right side wall portion 222 toward the center of the effect space portion R.

  In the present embodiment, which of the effect by the left movable effect device 360 and the effect by the right movable effect device 370 is determined according to the reliability of the variable display game. Specifically, it is set so that the degree of reliability is higher when the effect by the left movable effect device 360 is executed than when the effect by the right movable effect device 370 is executed. Has been. Further, the moving distance of the movable members (361, 371) may be changed according to the reliability.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5C, when the rendering is performed by both the left movable rendering device 360 and the right movable rendering device 370, the reliability may be further increased. .

  In addition, you may make it differ the content to alert | report with the production | presentation by the left movable production | presentation apparatus 360 and the production | presentation by the right movable production | presentation apparatus 370. The notification contents may be made different only when an effect is produced by both the left movable effect device 360 and the right movable effect device 370.

  Next, details of the medal path mechanism 90 provided on the back surface of the front door 2 in the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 7, and 8. FIG. 6 is a rear view showing the structure of the medal path mechanism 90 provided on the back surface of the front door 2 in the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 of the medal path mechanism unit 90 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The medal path mechanism 90 includes an insertion port forming member 91 that forms the medal insertion port 15, a selector base member 92, a flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93, a recovery rail 94, and a payout flow path member 95. Prepare. The selector base member 92 is provided below the insertion port forming member 91. The flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 is formed integrally with the selector base member 92 and discriminates between regular medals and irregular medals. The collection rail 94 guides medals allowed by the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 to a medal storage unit (not shown) at the top of the medal payout device 63 (see FIG. 9). The payout flow path member 95 receives the irregular medal repelled by the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 from the return medal inlet 951 and returns it to the tray 27.

  In the middle of the payout flow path member 95, a payout medal introduction port 952 that is received to receive the medal paid out from the medal payout device 63 to the tray 27 is provided. Further, a coin blocker (not shown) is attached to the payout flow path member 95 in order to reduce the collision sound of the medals flowing in from the payout medal inlet 952. In addition, the lower end portion of the payout flow path member 95 is provided with a forward inclined portion that guides the dropped medal to the tray 27 side (medal payout port 28).

  The flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 returns the inserted medal from the return port 931 to the upper part of the payout flow path member 95 when an irregular medal is inserted or when the medal is not acceptable. Drain to the inlet. The flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 includes a medal insertion detector 922 (see FIG. 7) that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15. The medal insertion detector 922 includes a rotation plate that is rotated by the inserted medal and a spring for returning the rotation plate to a predetermined position after the medal has passed. Then, the insertion of a medal is detected by the photo switch detecting the change in position of the rotated rotating plate. Further, the medal insertion detector 922 can detect whether or not a medal has been inserted, and can determine whether the inserted medal is a regular medal or an illegal medal (intrusion of foreign matter).

  Further, on the downstream side of the medal insertion detector 922, a flow path switching member 932 for distributing the inserted medals to the return port 931 or the recovery rail 94, and a state conversion solenoid 938 (for converting the flow path switching member 932). State conversion means, see FIG. The configuration of the flow path switching member 932 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, on the downstream side of the flow path switching member 932, a medal intake detector 925 that detects a medal allowed by the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 and flowing down toward the recovery rail 94 is provided. The medal take-in detector 925 can detect not only that a medal has been taken but also that the medal flow path 939 is jammed by the flow path switching member 932. Specifically, the medal acquisition detector 925 includes a detection switch (SW) 1 (925a) and a detection switch 2 (925b). The detection switch 1 (925a) and the detection switch 2 (925b) detect the medal in the detection switch 1 (925a) when the medal is blocked in the medal flow path 939 (see FIG. 8) by the flow path switching member 932. The detection switch 2 (925b) is arranged at a position where no medal is detected.

  Next, the operation by the flow path switching member 932 will be described. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ of the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 according to the embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram for explaining a medal flow path switching function by the flow path switching member 932. . FIG. 8A shows a take-in state for distributing medals to the collection rail 94 and taking them in, and FIG. 8B shows a return state (normal state, projecting state) in which medals are distributed to the return port 931.

  In the normal state, the flow path switching member 932 includes an L-shaped arm portion 935 having one side (horizontal arm portion 935a) in the horizontal direction, the other side (vertical arm portion 935b) in the vertical direction and slightly inclined toward the front surface, The upper guide portion 933 extends in the vertical direction from one end of the arm portion 935a, and the restriction piece 934 protrudes in the horizontal direction from the other end of the vertical arm portion 935b.

  Further, a bearing portion through which the rotation shaft 936 can be inserted is formed near the vertical arm portion 935b of the horizontal arm portion 935a. The arm portion 935 is configured to be rotatable within a predetermined range about a rotation shaft 936 provided on the support portion 937 by a state conversion solenoid (SOL) 938.

  As shown in (A), in the taken-in state, the horizontal arm portion 935a extends from the opening 921 of the selector base member 92 to the front side, and the upper guide portion 933 is located on the front side of the selector base member 92. . Further, the upper guide portion 933 extends below the ceiling portion of the medal flow path 939 so that the upper end of the medal flowing down the medal flow path 939 does not fall to the cover member 96 side. By configuring in this way, it is possible to stably guide to the collection rail 94 in the inserted medals and the taken-in state.

  Further, the opening 924 of the selector base member 92 penetrates from the back side of the selector base member 92 to the medal flow path 939 side. Further, the restriction piece 934 of the flow path switching member 932 is inserted through the opening 924. Then, in the taken-in state, as shown in (A), the medal inserted toward the recovery rail 94 without the tip of the restricting piece 934 protruding into the medal flow path 939 flows down, and in the returned state ( As shown in B), the medal inserted with the leading end of the restriction piece 934 protruding into the medal flow path 939 cannot flow down to the collection rail 94 but flows down to the return port 931.

  In the return state, as shown in (B), the flow path switching member 932 is rotated clockwise around the rotation axis by the state conversion solenoid 938, and the tip end portion of the restriction piece 934 projects into the medal flow path 939. . At this time, the upper guide part 933 moves to the front side, and the medal flowing down the medal flow path 939 falls to the front side and flows down to the return port 931 side.

  The return state is shifted to a case where medals have been taken up to a predetermined maximum number of credits, an irregular medal is inserted, or a variable display game is started.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control system of the slot machine 1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component which is the same as that of the component demonstrated in FIG. 1, or it corresponds, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The control system of the slot machine 1 includes a game control device (main control device) 50 that controls the game in an integrated manner, and an effect control device (sub control) that performs overall control related to game effects under the control of the game control device 50. Control device) 70 and a power supply device 40 for supplying power to these control devices. Each component of the control system is disposed inside the casing of the slot machine 1. In addition, the power supply device 40 is configured to supply backup power so that data stored in the RAM 50c and the RAM 70c (described later) is retained during a power failure.

  The game control device 50 includes a central processing unit (CPU) 50a, a read only memory (ROM) 50b, a random access memory (RAM) 50c, an input / output interface (hereinafter referred to as “I / F”) 50d, and a prize used for internal lottery. A random number generator 50e for generating various random values such as determination random numbers is provided.

  The CPU 50a includes a control unit and a calculation unit, and performs various types of calculation processing, data input / output, generation of control signals, and the like as the calculation processing device of the game control device 50.

  The ROM 50b stores internal lottery determination values (determination tables) and the like in addition to control programs and control data for executing various processes. The ROM 50b stores a stop control table that is referred to when the reel 6 is stopped in each game. For example, there are a stop control table corresponding to various types of winning winnings, a stop control table corresponding to a loss, and the like. In the stop control table, the reel 6 pull-in stop control for forming the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning state (the state of the set winning flag) to the maximum on the effective line and various winnings not internally won. Stores the data for controlling the kicking stop of the reel that removes the corresponding symbol combination from the effective line (the maximum number of sliding frames of 4 frames, etc.), and the stop position depends on the operation stop order and operation timing of the reel 6 It is set in advance.

  In the RAM 50c, a random number storage area for internal lottery sampled by the CPU 50a based on the start operation, various data (for example, credit number data, bet number data, internal winning state data, and predetermined symbol combination modes are derived. A storage area for temporarily storing data relating to payout based on the data, data indicating the winning probability value of the internal lottery, and the work area of the CPU 50a.

  The I / F 50d includes a medal insertion detector 922, a medal take-in detector 925, a start lever switch 52, a reel stop switch 53 (a first reel (left) stop switch 53a, a first switch) through a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown). 2 reel (middle) stop switch 53b, 3rd reel (right) stop switch 53c), reel position detection switch 54 (left reel position detection switch 54a, middle reel position detection switch 54b, right reel position detection switch 54c), Max Bet Various signals output from the switch 57, the payout button switch 58, the payout medal detection switch 59, the setting device 60, the reset switch 61, the door open / close detection switch 62, the radio wave detection switch 81, the medal full switch 82, etc. are sent to the CPU 50a. Supply.

  Here, the medal insertion detector 922 is provided in the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 to detect all passage of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15, and the medals discharged from the return slot 931 are also counted. The On the other hand, the medal take-in detector 925 does not detect medals discharged from the return port 931, and the number of medals detected by the medal take-in detector 925 is counted as the number of bets.

  The start lever switch 52 is a switch for detecting that the start lever 21 has been operated. The first reel (left) stop switch 53a, the second reel (middle) stop switch 53b, and the third reel (right) stop switch 53c of the reel stop switch 53 have corresponding reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c). This is a switch for detecting that the is operated. The left reel position detection switch 54a, the middle reel position detection switch 54b, and the right reel position detection switch 54c of the reel position detection switch 54 are switches for detecting the rotation phase of the corresponding reel (6a, 6b, 6c). It is.

  The max bet switch 57 is a switch for detecting that the max bet button 17 has been operated. The withdrawal button switch 58 is a switch for detecting that the withdrawal button 20 has been operated. The payout medal detection switch 59 detects the medals paid out from the medal payout device 63, and the number of medals paid out is counted by counting the detection signals from the switches.

  The setting device 60 is for switching the setting of the slot machine 1 based on the setting change operation. By this setting device 60, for example, the winning probability (internal winning probability) of various winnings in the internal lottery for each game and the machine discount are set to any one of a plurality of settings (for example, settings 1 to 6).

  The reset switch 61 is, for example, a switch for detecting that the key inserted into the keyhole 23 is rotated in the opposite direction to when the front door 2 is opened, and resets the slot machine 1 based on this detection. is there. Note that the game control device 50 cancels the error state of the slot machine 1 based on the detection signal from the reset switch 61, for example. The door open / close detection switch 62 is a switch for detecting the open state of the front door 2.

  The radio wave detection switch 81 is for detecting abnormal radio waves and for preventing fraud. The medal full switch 82 detects that the medals in the hopper of the medal payout device 63 are full.

  In addition, the I / F 50d sends a control signal output from the CPU 50a to an effect control device 70, a credit number display unit 11, a game progress display unit 12, a payout number display unit 13, a game via an output port and a driver (not shown). Status display unit 18, bet number display unit 19, medal payout device 63, reel motor 64 (left reel motor 64a, middle reel motor 64b, right reel motor 64c), external signal output terminal (with the slot machine 1) Are output to the terminal 33), the state conversion solenoid 938, etc. Thereby, the game control device 50 can control various components.

  The control signal output to the external signal output terminal 33 includes, for example, a signal indicating the number of bets output when the start lever 21 is operated (game medal insertion signal), and a payout output when a medal is paid out. A signal indicating the number of medals (game medal payout signal), a signal indicating that the big bonus state is being set (BB signal), a signal indicating that the regular bonus state is being set (RB signal), and that the replay time state is being set Signal (RT signal), a signal (security signal) output when the front door 2 is opened or when a setting is changed. In addition, you may make it output the identification information (chip ID) which can identify the game control apparatus uniquely set to CPU, when output events, such as after power-on, generate | occur | produce.

  In the game control device 50, for example, the CPU 50 a updates the random number every predetermined cycle time (for example, +1), performs the control of sampling the random number at that time at the detection timing by the start lever switch 52, and the sampled random number is Internal lottery is performed as a random number for internal lottery. Further, the game control device 50 refers to the corresponding stop control table based on the internal lottery result and the stop operation timing of the reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c), and the reel motors (64a, 64b, 64c). ), The reels (6a, 6b, 6c) are stopped so that a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 5. Note that the random number generated by the random number generator 50e may be sampled.

  Furthermore, the game control device 50, when the symbol constituting the symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning winning is stopped before the reaching the valid line, the reel (6a, 6b, 6c) So-called pull-in stop control is performed to delay the stop timing so that the symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, when a stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning that is not won internally is formed on the active line, the timing for stopping the reels (6a, 6b, 6c) is delayed and enabled. So-called kicking stop control is performed so that the symbols constituting the symbol combination form that can be formed on the line pass through the effective line. In the pull-in stop control and the kick-off stop control by the game control device 50, the time value at which the stop timing can be changed (delayed) is determined in advance, and the stop operation is normally performed (in the case of 21 frames per reel). The time value is such that it can be drawn or kicked within a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 4 frames) from the performed position. That is, the game control device 50 stops the reel 6 so that the symbol combination mode according to the lottery result by the winning lottery means (game control device 50) can be derived based on the operation mode of the stop operation unit (reel stop button 24). Reel stop control means to be controlled.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 70 includes a CPU 70a, a ROM 70b, a RAM 70c, an I / F 70d, and the like. The effect control device 70 performs control of effect display on the main display 3, control of effect by the backlight 67, the frame light emitting device 7, and the speaker 4 based on information related to the game supplied from the game control device 50. . In addition, the setting of the volume when performing an effect or the like by the speaker 4 can be performed by a volume volume switch (not shown) connected to the effect control device 70.

  In addition, the effect control device 70 is based on the information about the game supplied from the game control device 50, the stop button LED 66, the sub display 310, the movable effect device (360, 370), the payout notification lamp 16, the probability mode display unit. (320, 330), the expectation level display unit (340, 350) is controlled. Furthermore, based on the input information from the effect button 10, control etc. which change an effect aspect are performed. Based on input information from the operation input unit switch 30c, control for switching display contents of the sub display 310 is performed. Note that the stop button LED 66 enters a valid notification lighting state based on the reception of the stop valid command, and enters an invalid notification lighting state based on the reception of the stop command. The invalid notification lighting state may be turned off.

  Here, the information related to the game supplied from the game control device 50 is output when the game is started by operating the start lever 21 or the bet number information output when the bet number is set by the betting operation. Corresponding to game start information, internal winning information indicating the lottery result by internal lottery, game state information indicating the current gaming state (normal gaming state, BB state, RB state, RT state, etc.), and reel 6 during variable display The reel stop information indicating that the reel stop button 24 to be operated is included.

  The I / F 70d outputs various signals input from the game control device 50 to the CPU 70a via a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown). In addition, the I / F 70d receives a control signal input from the CPU 70a via an output port and a driver (not shown), a main display 3, a speaker 4, a frame light emitting device 7 including a lamp and an LED, a back including an LED, and the like. Output to light 67 and the like. Thereby, the main display 3 and the speaker 4 can be controlled by the effect control device 70.

  Thereby, for example, the effect control device 70 performs control to display a small role winning notice display, a special winning notice display, an effect display (thing completed in one game or over a plurality of games) on the main display 3. Do. Further, the effect control device 70 performs decoration by light emission from the frame light emitting device 7 provided on the front door 2 and effects by sound from the speaker 4. Note that the communication between the game control device 50 and the effect control device 70 described above is in a form in which a control signal can be transmitted only in one direction from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. An illegal signal is prevented from being input to the game control device 50.

  Here, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. When playing a game in the slot machine 1, the player first inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 15 or operates the max bet button 17 to input (set) the number of bets (betting input, betting operation). . When the betting input is performed, the active line is set, and the operation of the start lever 21 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. Then, when the start lever 21 is operated, an internal lottery process is performed in the game control device 50, and winning / non-winning of the winning (role) is determined, and the reels (6a, 6b, 6c) start to change.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed, the reels (6a, 6b, 6c) are stopped from rotating based on the operation of the reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c) for which the stop operation is enabled, and a predetermined symbol is displayed in the symbol display window 9a. Is displayed. When the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning prize (combination) is formed on the active line, a prize is established, and a medal corresponding to this prize (combination) is paid out. The game of one segment is completed as described above, and thereafter, the game is advanced by repeating this operation.

  FIG. 10 is a view for explaining the reels (6a, 6b, 6c) provided in the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is an example of the arrangement of symbols formed on the reel seal (sheet) 6d constituting the outer peripheral surface of the reels (6a, 6b, 6c) provided in the slot machine 1, and (B) is viewed from the symbol display window 9a. Figure 2 shows a predetermined enableable line for a 3x3 symbol matrix to be played.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the reel seal 6d has 7 “black 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “replay” that can be identified. Types of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. The upper and lower end portions of each reel seal 6d are portions that become seams when wound around the reel 6.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a line (small mountain line) connecting the lower stage of the left reel 6a, the middle stage of the middle reel 6b, and the lower stage of the right reel 6c is an enabling line. The enabling line is activated when the number of bets (the number of bets) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 2 or 3 depending on the gaming state) by the insertion of medals by the player or input from credits ("betting operation"). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning combination (combination) is established based on the symbol combination mode (outcome) formed on the effective line. A plurality of lines that can be activated may be set.

  When winning is established, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are arranged on another line in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are arranged on the effective line. Such lines include a line that traverses the upper symbol of each reel (6a, 6b, 6c) (upper line), a line that traverses the middle symbol of each reel (6a, 6b, 6c) (intermediate line), There is a line (lower line) crossing the lower symbols of the reels (6a, 6b, 6c). Also, a line crossing the symbols on the upper stage of the left reel 6a, the middle stage of the middle reel 6b, and the lower stage of the right reel 6c (lower right diagonal line), a line crossing the symbols of the lower stage of the left reel 6a, the middle stage of the middle reel 6b, and the upper stage of the right reel 6c (upward to the right). Diagonal line). It should be noted that, in addition to the above, the symbols may be arranged in an apparent line on a virtual line positioned across the front portion (visible portion) facing the symbol display window 9a of each reel (6a, 6b, 6c). . In the following, a line (such as an upper line) on which an apparent symbol can be aligned when winning a prize is referred to as a symbol alignment line.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, symbol combination modes corresponding to each winning combination, and winning contents in the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus winning combination (BB winning combination) is determined as a special winning combination (special combination). In addition, if a special winning combination is won internally, the winning flag will be carried over to the next game even if the winning of the special winning combination cannot be established in the internal winning game, and the winning of the special winning combination will be established in subsequent games However, when the normal winning combination (small role) is elected, the winning of the normal winning combination (small role) is established with priority.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a normal winning combination (small role), a pseudo bonus lip 1 winning combination, a pseudo bonus lip 2 winning combination, a pseudo bonus lip 3 winning combination, a bell A winning combination, and a bell B winning combination. , Bellip A winning combination, Bellip B winning combination, watermelon winning combination, cherry winning combination, cherry lip winning combination, replay winning combination, one piece combination A winning combination and one piece combination B winning combination are defined. When a normal winning combination (small role) is won internally, the winning of the normal winning combination (small role) can be established only in the internally winning game. For example, if the winning of the normal winning combination (for example, watermelon winning combination) cannot be established at the timing of the stop operation (so-called “missing”), the winning flag of this normal winning combination (small role) is cleared and the next game Will not carry over.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the special winning combination, a winning combination is established when a bonus symbol combination mode of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is formed on the symbol alignment line, and then a special gaming state (BB State) occurs. The number of medals paid out when the special winning combination is established is zero. In the special gaming state, a game is executed using a determination table in which the internal winning probability of the Bell B winning combination is high. The game ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the special gaming state becomes 59 or more. However, two bets will be placed in the special gaming state, and the payout associated with the establishment of the Bell B winning combination will be two. Therefore, the net increase in the special gaming state is approximately zero (which may be negative). This is a so-called zero bonus.

  The pseudo bonus lip winning combination is “white 7-black 7-white 7” (pseudo bonus lip 1 winning combination), “white 7-white 7-white 7” (pseudo bonus lip 2 winning combination), “BAR-BAR- BAR "(pseudo bonus lip 3 winning combination) is a winning that is established when any of the symbol combination forms is formed on the symbol alignment line, and a replay (replay game) that allows the game to be executed without a betting operation again upon establishment. ) Is given. Further, the pseudo bonus lip winning combination is not established unless the operation order (push order) of the predetermined reel stop button 24 is established.

  Further, an AT state (a pseudo bonus state to be described later) assists in derivation of a winning combination (establishment of winning) over a predetermined number of games based on the establishment of the pseudo bonus winning combination. Note that the predetermined number of games in which the AT state continues is 30 games for the pseudo bonus lip 1 winning combination and the pseudo bonus lip 2 winning combination, and 10 games for the pseudo bonus lip 3 winning combination. Further, the AT state (pseudo bonus) may continue until a predetermined number of medals are obtained instead of the predetermined number of games. For example, in the case of the pseudo bonus lip 1 winning combination and the pseudo bonus lip 2 winning combination, the number is 200, and in the case of the pseudo bonus lip 3 winning combination, the number is 75. Further, the AT state (pseudo bonus state) may continue until a predetermined winning combination (for example, Bell A) is won a predetermined number of times. For example, in the case of the pseudo bonus lip 1 winning combination and the pseudo bonus lip 2 winning combination, it is 20 times, and in the case of the pseudo bonus lip 3 winning combination, it is 10 times.

  The Bell A winning combination is a prize that is established when the symbol combination mode of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is formed on a diagonal line that rises to the right of the symbol alignment line, and nine medals are paid out. There are four types of Bell A winning combinations, and each is not established unless the operation order (push order) of the predetermined reel stop button 24 is reached. The predetermined operation order includes middle, left, right operation order, middle, right, left operation order, right, left, middle operation order, right, middle, left operation order.

  The Bell B winning combination is a prize that is established when the symbol combination mode of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is formed on the lower line of the symbol alignment lines, and it is four when it is not in the BB state (special game state). Medals are paid out, and two medals are paid out in the BB state. There are three types of Bell B winning combinations, and each is not established unless the operation order (push order) of the predetermined reel stop button 24 is reached. The predetermined operation order includes an operation order in which the middle reel 6b is first stopped (middle, right, left operation order or middle, left, right operation order), right, left, middle operation order, right, middle, There is a left operation order. In the BB state, the operation order of the reel stop button 24 is not questioned.

  That is, except in the BB state, the Bell A winning combination and the Bell B winning combination are not established in the operation order in which the left reel 6a is stopped first. Other than the operation order in which the left reel 6a is first stopped except in the AT state or the special gaming state in which the operation order is notified, the penalty is described later. I try not to aim for the B prize winning role. The Bell A winning combination and the Bell B winning combination may include those that are established in the order of operations in which the left reel 6a is first stopped. In this case, the winning order is established in which the left reel 6a is first stopped. It is desirable that the winning probability is lower than that which is established in the operation order in which the left reel 6a is not stopped first.

  The Bell Lip A winning combination is one of the replay winnings. The winning combination is established when the symbol combination mode of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is formed on the upper line of the symbol alignment lines. A replay game (replay game) that allows the game to be executed without any change is awarded. The BELLIP B winning combination is one of the replay winnings. The winning combination is established when the symbol combination mode of “BELL-BELL-BELL” is formed on the middle line of the symbol alignment lines. A replay game (replay game) that allows the game to be executed without any change is awarded.

  The watermelon winning combination is a prize that is established when the symbol combination mode of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is formed on the symbol alignment line, and four medals are paid out. The cherry winning combination is a winning that is established when the symbol combination mode of “cherry-ANY-ANY” is formed on the middle line of the symbol alignment lines, and one medal is paid out. Here, “ANY” indicates that any symbol may be used. Note that a plurality of types of winning combinations (weak winning combination, strong winning combination) may be included in the watermelon winning combination and cherry winning combination, and the transition probability to the AT state may be varied.

  The cherry lip winning combination is one of the replay winnings, and when the symbol combination mode of “cherry-ANY-ANY” is formed in a pattern arrangement line other than the middle line, that is, the left reel 6a has a cherry on the upper stage or the lower stage. It is a prize that is established when it stops. Here, “ANY” indicates that any symbol may be used. When the cherry lip winning combination is established, a replay game (replay game) that can be executed without a betting operation is awarded.

  The replay winning combination is a winning that is established when the symbol combination mode of “replay-replay-replay” is formed on the symbol alignment line. When the replay winning combination is established, a replay game (replay game) that allows the game to be executed without a betting operation is awarded.

  The single winning combination A winning combination is a prize that is established when the symbol combination form of “Replay-Replay-Bell” is formed on the middle line of the symbol alignment lines. The one-piece combination B winning combination is a winning that is established when the symbol combination mode of “replay-replay-cherry” is formed on the middle line of the symbol alignment lines. When each one winning combination is established, one medal is paid out. The one-piece combination A winning combination or the one-piece combination B winning combination overlaps with the Bell A winning combination or the Bell B winning combination, and the operation order of the Bell A winning combination and the Bell B winning combination matches. In the case of being missed due to absence, a single winning combination A winning combination or a single winning combination B winning combination is established.

  When one of the above winning combinations is won internally by the internal lottery in the game control device 50, the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination won can be derived on the symbol alignment line (effective line). On the other hand, if no winning combination is won internally, the winning combination is lost, and the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination is not formed on the symbol alignment line (effective line).

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if a special winning combination cannot be established in a game in which the special winning combination is won internally, the winning flag is carried over to the subsequent games, but in the game in which the winning flag is carried over It is also possible to win internal prizes for regular winning roles (small roles). In this case, the priority order of the winnings derived on the active line is, for example, replay winning> normal winning combination (small role) other than replay winning> special winning combination. That is, even if the winning flag for the special winning combination is carried over, if the normal winning combination (small role) is elected internally, the withdrawal is stopped so that the winning of the normal winning combination (small role) takes precedence Control is made.

  In addition, among the regular winning combinations (small roles), the watermelon winning combination, cherry winning combination, and cherry lip winning combination are rare, and in the winning game, a lottery (for example, AT right acquisition lottery) to a state advantageous to the player ) Etc. can be won with a higher probability than when other small roles are won.

  FIG. 12 is a view for explaining the transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows a state transition diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the game control device 50, and (B) shows a breakdown of winning combinations in the winning / winning determination table for each gaming state.

  The normal game state ST200 is a non-RT state that is not an RT state, and is a state in which a game proceeds with three bets. In the normal gaming state ST200, when the special winning combination cannot be established by winning the special winning combination (the bonus winning), the process proceeds to the internal medium state ST210. The internal middle state ST210 is an RT state in which the winning probability of a replay winning is higher than that in the normal game state ST200, and is a state in which the game proceeds with three bets.

  When a special winning combination is established in a game in which a special winning combination is internally won in the normal gaming state ST200 (bonus winning) or when a special winning combination is established in the internal intermediate state ST210 (bonus winning), the special gaming state ST220 is entered. Transition. In this special game state ST220, the game is advanced with two bets, and when the end condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal game state ST200.

  Referring to (B), the breakdown of winning combinations in the winning determination table for each gaming state is shown. In the normal TBL used in the normal game state ST200, the winning of the special winning combination (BB) occurs with a probability of 1/4, and the small role other than the replay winning combination (Bell A winning combination, Bell B winning combination, watermelon winning combination, Cherry winning combination, single winning combination A winning combination, single winning combination B winning combination) or single winning combination occurs with a probability of 1/4. In addition, a replay winning (Bellip A winning combination, Bellip B winning combination, Cherry Lip winning combination, Replay winning combination) will occur with a 1/6 chance, and to 1/3 of any winning combination However, it will be a loss that is not won.

  In the internal medium TBL used in the internal medium state ST210, all the prizes for the special winning combination (BB) in the normal TBL are all replay winning (pseudo bonus winning combination, Bellip A winning combination, Bellip B winning combination, Cherry Lip Winning prizes, replay winning prizes) alone or in duplicate. In addition, almost all of the lost in TBL during the normal period will be a replay winning (pseudo bonus winning combination, bell lip A winning combination, bell lip B winning combination, cherry lip winning combination, replay winning combination) Loss is won with a probability of 1/65536.

  In the TBL during BB used in the special game state ST220, a single small role (Bell B winning combination only) is won with a probability of 99/100, and lost with a probability of 1/100. In the special game state ST220, the game is advanced with two bets, and only the Bell B winning combination can be won. Since the number of payouts in the case where the Bell B winning combination is established in the special game state is 2, the number of medals does not increase in the special game state ST220 (in the case of a loss, the medals decrease).

  Note that in the normal gaming state ST200, it is not notified that the special winning combination has been internally won, so in most cases, the special winning combination cannot be established in the game in which the special winning combination has been internally won, and the internal medium state ST 210 is entered. Transition. In the internal state ST210, the normal winning combination (small role) is won with a high probability. However, when the normal winning combination (small role) is won, it is controlled to be established in preference to the special winning combination. Therefore, a special winning combination cannot be established. In addition, a special winning combination can be established in the event of a loss, but it will not be notified that it is a loss, so if the player loses with a very low winning probability, it will be established aiming for the special winning combination. It is difficult to make it. For this reason, most of the game stays in the internal middle state ST210.

  In addition, the winning / winning determination for each gaming state in the main gaming state may be made common to each setting. In this case, a setting difference may be provided in the lottery values in the effect control device 70 such as the AT winning probability and the special zone shift rate, and the payout rate may be changed.

  FIG. 13 is a state transition diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the effect control device 70 according to the embodiment of the present invention. The gaming state in the production control device 70 is roughly divided into non-assist that does not assist the derivation of a winning combination (establishment of winning) without notifying the operation order of the reel stop button 24 (stop order of the reel 6). Time state (non-AT state) ST300 and assist time state (AT state) that assists in derivation of a small role by notifying the operation order of reel stop button 24 (stop order of reel 6) in which a small winning combination is established It is divided into and. The AT state ST350 has a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player because the chance of winning a small role is increased compared to the non-AT state ST300. Since the specific game state is generated and ended by the effect control device 70, the effect control device 70 constitutes a specific game generating means.

  The effect control device 70 counts the number of times the game is executed, and when the number of times of execution reaches a preset number of times (number of released games), the non-AT state ST300 shifts to the AT state ST350. Yes. In addition, when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied, a reset process for resetting the number of executions of the game or the specified number of times is performed. By this reset process, the number of executions is initialized (cleared to 0) and the specified number of times is set. The value is reset to one of a plurality of values. In the reset process, it is only necessary to update (determine and set) the relationship between the number of game executions and the specified number of times (the number of remaining games until the number of game executions reaches the specified number).

  The case where the predetermined reset condition is satisfied is, for example, when the AT state ST350 is ended, when the special gaming state ST220 is ended, or when the setting is changed by the setting device 60 (including changing to the same setting). When the game is started after the operation of the RAM clear switch for clearing the information backed up in the RAM 50c of the game control device 50 is performed, this is a predetermined operation that can be executed by the player, not the operation of the RAM clear switch. This is a case where the game is started after a reset operation.

  In the non-AT state ST300, the user stays in any one of the normal zone ST310, the mission zone ST320, and the specific effect zone ST330. In the normal zone ST310, a lottery for shifting to the mission zone ST320 is performed for each game. Winning probabilities in this transition lottery include a low probability state with a low probability, a high probability state with a higher probability than the low probability state, and an ultra-high probability state with a higher probability than the high probability state. Either one is set according to the number of games from the reset process. In any state, the winning probabilities differ according to the result of the internal lottery. For example, when a rare combination is won internally, the winning probability is higher than when other small combinations are won. Furthermore, the winning probability in the transfer lottery is set according to the internal mode, and there are three types of normal A mode, normal B mode, and heaven mode. Details of the internal mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the normal zone ST310, an effect (display screen) is set according to the winning probability of the transition lottery, and the normal suggestion effect ST311 that is highly likely to be selected in the low-accuracy state, in the high-accuracy state. One of high-accuracy suggestion effect ST312 that is highly likely to be selected and one that is highly likely to be selected in an ultra-high-accuracy state is set.

  If the lottery for shifting to the mission zone ST320 is won in the normal zone ST310, the zone shifts to the mission zone ST320. The mission zone ST320 is in a state where the winning probability of the AT right acquisition lottery for drawing the AT right that is the right to stay (enter) in the AT state ST350 is higher than that in the normal zone ST310, and a certain game It is possible to stay over a number (for example, 10 games or 20 games). If the AT right acquisition lottery is not won within a certain number of games staying in the mission zone ST320, the end condition is satisfied, and the routine proceeds to the normal zone ST310.

  In addition, when the AT right acquisition lottery is won within a certain number of games staying in the mission zone ST320, the number of AT rights determined by the AT right acquisition lottery is acquired, and the AT number is exhausted after the predetermined number of games is consumed. Transition to state ST350 (may proceed to AT state ST350 from the next game that acquired the AT right). In this case, it is assumed that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the specified number (the number of released games) (the number of games has been released), and reset processing is performed (the reset timing will be described later).

  Even in the normal zone ST310, when a rare role that plays a specific role is won, an AT right acquisition lottery (direct hit AT lottery) is performed. Although the winning probability of this AT right acquisition lottery is very low, the winning probability varies depending on the type of rare role won internally. If the AT right acquisition lottery is won, the number of AT rights determined by the AT right acquisition lottery is acquired, and the process proceeds to the AT state ST350. Also in this case, it is assumed that the number of times of execution of the game has reached the specified number of times (the number of games has been released), and reset processing is performed (the reset timing will be described later).

  In addition, when making it transfer to AT state ST350 from the next game of the game won by AT right acquisition lottery, it is considered that the number of executions has reached the specified number of times by winning the AT right acquisition lottery. In addition, after the game won in the AT right acquisition lottery, when a predetermined number of games are executed and then the process proceeds to the AT state ST350, the predetermined number of remaining games up to the specified number of times is determined by the AT right acquisition lottery. To decrease. That is, it can be said that the AT right acquisition lottery is a lottery for reducing the number of remaining games up to the specified number of times.

  Further, when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number before reaching the specified number in the normal zone ST310, or when the number of executions is before the predetermined number before reaching the specified number and the transition lottery is won, the specific effect is given. It shifts to specific production zone ST330 to perform. The specific effect is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the number of executions may reach the specified number of times over a plurality of games, and after performing a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of times, A continuous effect that is executed over a number of games is performed. There are multiple types of continuous effects A to C, and one of these is selected and executed. Note that a plurality of types of continuous effects may be prepared, and one of them may be selected and executed.

  When the transition is made to the specific effect zone ST330, first, a continuous effect state ST331 in which a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of games is set, and then a continuous effect state ST332 in which any of the continuous effects A to C is performed over a plurality of games. Become. When the number of executions reaches a specified number before reaching the specified number of times, the game proceeds to the specific effect zone ST330. The number of executions reaches the specified number of games. As a result, the number of AT rights determined by the lottery is acquired, and the process proceeds to the AT state ST350 from the next game in which the continuous performance has ended. That is, the game state is shifted to a state advantageous to the player by releasing the number of games (release of the G number).

  In addition, in the case of shifting to the specific performance zone ST330 because the number of executions is a predetermined number before reaching the specified number of times, the AT state from the next game of the game where the number of executions reaches the specified number of times and the number of games is released If it is set to move to ST350, the number of executions reaches the specified number in the game where the continuous production ends. In addition, when the game is set to shift to the AT state ST350 from the game in which the number of executions reaches the specified number of times and the number of games is canceled, the number of executions is set to the specified number of times in the game next to the game where the continuous production ends. To reach. In any case, it is only necessary to shift to the AT state ST350 from the next game in which the continuous performance has ended.

  Further, when the number of executions is before a predetermined number before the predetermined number of times is reached and the transition lottery is won and the process shifts to the specific effect zone ST330, the number of executions is also the game for which the continuous effect has ended or the next game. Since the prescribed number of times has not been reached, the end condition is satisfied by the end of the continuous performance, and the game moves to the normal zone ST310.

  Here, the specific effect that is executed when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number before reaching the specified number of times and the specific effect that is executed when moving to the specified effect zone ST330 does not reach the specified number of times. The first specific effect to be executed is performed. In addition, the specific effect that is executed when the number of executions reaches a specified number of times before the specified number of times is reached and the game is shifted to the specific effect zone ST330 is executed over a plurality of times until the specified number of times is reached. The second specific production is performed. The first specific effect and the second specific effect are preferably difficult to distinguish at the initial stage of the continuous effect or the continuous effect, and it is preferable to perform an effect that can be determined at the final stage of the continuous effect. However, an effect suggesting which specific effect is in the initial stage of the continuous effect or the continuous effect may be included.

  The AT state ST350 includes a normal AT state ST351, an additional AT state ST352, a promotion lottery state ST360, a first pseudo bonus state ST361, a second pseudo bonus state ST362, and a third pseudo bonus state ST363. . The AT state ST350 is a state that is more advantageous to the player than at least the normal gaming state, and the transition to the AT state ST350 gives a gaming value to the player. Since the control to shift from the non-AT state ST300 to the AT state ST350 is executed by the effect control device 70, the effect control device 70 serves as a value giving means for giving the game value to the player.

  In the normal AT state ST351, one set of 50 games can be executed for each AT right. When a plurality of AT rights are acquired, one set of 50 games is played in the normal AT state ST351 based on one AT right, and other AT rights are stocked. If one set of games based on the one AT right is completed and there is a stock of AT right, a new set of 50 games in the normal AT state ST351 is newly added based on the AT right that has been stored. Execution is set and the normal AT state ST351 continues.

  Further, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the normal AT state ST351, the state shifts to the added AT state ST352. In addition, the transition condition to the added AT state ST352 is that, for example, a predetermined number of points awarded based on the winning of a rare combination (watermelon winning combination, cherry winning combination, cherry lip winning combination) has reached a predetermined number. . It should be noted that a transition lottery may be performed at the time of winning a rare role, and winning the transition lottery may be satisfied as a transition condition.

  The added AT state ST352 is a state in which the winning probability of the AT right acquisition lottery is higher than that in the normal AT state ST351. When 10 games are executed in the added AT state ST352, the end condition is satisfied, and the routine proceeds to the normal AT state ST351.

  When all the number of games that can be executed in the AT state ST350 is exhausted based on the AT right in the normal AT state ST351, that is, when there is no stock of AT right, the termination condition is satisfied and the normal zone ST310 of the non-AT state ST300 is entered. Transition. In consideration of the number of AT rights to be acquired determined by lottery when AT rights are acquired and the probability of acquiring AT rights in the added AT state ST352, one set (50 games) of games has been completed. There is a stock of AT rights later and the probability that the AT state will continue is 10%, 50% or 70%.

  Note that the gaming state shown in FIG. 13 is a gaming state when the gaming state in the gaming control device 50 is the normal gaming state ST200 or the internal middle state ST210. Transition to gaming state. Then, after the end of the special game state ST220, the game state where the user stayed before the occurrence of the special game state ST220 is returned. However, when the special gaming state ST220 ends, the specified number of times the number of games is canceled and the number of times the game is executed are reset. Therefore, the transition to the normal zone ST310 may always be made with the end of the special gaming state ST220.

  Also, when a predetermined winning combination is won in the normal zone of the non-AT state ST300, or when the number of games executed in the specific effect zone reaches the specified number and the number of games is released (G number is released) Then, the process proceeds to the promotion lottery state ST360 of the AT state ST350. In addition, when the number of games is canceled by the upper limit number (ceiling) of each zone, the normal AT state ST351 may be shifted to.

  In the promotion lottery state ST360, a lottery for shifting to the pseudo bonus state is performed. In the promotion lottery state ST360, a pseudo bonus winning combination is won by an internal lottery, and when the pseudo bonus winning combination is established, each pseudo bonus state is entered. The pseudo bonus state to be transferred is determined according to the established pseudo bonus winning combination. For example, when winning in the pseudo bonus lip 1 winning combination, when winning in the first pseudo bonus state ST361, pseudo bonus lip 2 winning combination. Will move to the second pseudo bonus state ST362, and if the winning is in the pseudo bonus lip 3 winning combination, the process proceeds to the third pseudo bonus state ST363. The promotion lottery state ST360 may be completed with a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) and returned to the non-AT state ST300, or may continue until a specific winning combination is established, You may be allowed to continue until winning the falling lottery.

  Promotion lottery state ST360 selects one of a plurality of types of pseudo bonus states (specific game states) having different degrees of expectation and durations, and further corresponds to a change period for changing the selected pseudo bonus state The production control device 70 serves as a change period generating means for generating a change period from the normal gaming state. Further, the effect control device 70 serves as a value changing means for changing the game value corresponding to the transitional pseudo bonus state in order to change the transitional pseudo bonus state based on the game result in the promoted lottery state ST360. Yes.

  In the pseudo bonus state, when an AT right is acquired by establishing a predetermined winning combination or winning an AT right acquisition lottery, the process proceeds to the normal AT state ST351 after the pseudo bonus state ends. Whether or not the AT right can be acquired during the pseudo bonus state has a higher expectation (winning probability) in the order of the first pseudo bonus state ST361, the second pseudo bonus state ST362, and the third pseudo bonus state ST363.

  Further, an upper limit number of games is set in each pseudo bonus state. Specifically, the first pseudo bonus state ST361 and the second pseudo bonus state ST362 are 30G, and the third pseudo bonus state ST363 is 10G. ing. When a predetermined number of games are completed in each pseudo bonus state, the process proceeds to the normal zone ST310 in the non-AT state ST300.

  In addition to the AT (assist time) state, an ART state in which an RT (replay time) state in which replay is easy to win may be added to the specific game state. In the ART state, as in the AT state, the pressing order of the reel stop button 24 is notified for a predetermined period (assist period) defined by the number of games, the number of payouts, and the like. The normal AT state in this embodiment may be replaced with the ART state.

  In this case, in addition to executing the replay game, a “special replay” (specific prize) that is a transition condition for shifting from the current gaming state to another gaming state (ART state) is added to the winning combination. To do. The “special replay” may be set to require a correct answer in the pressing order, and the normal “replay” may be set when the pressing order is incorrect.

  The transition from the ART state to another gaming state may be a digestion of a predetermined number of games or a payout of a predetermined number of medals, or a case where the reels are dropped without stopping in the pressing order notified in the ART state. There may be. The transition destination from the ART state may be shifted to the normal gaming state or the AT state, or the ART ready state may be defined and shifted to this ART ready state. At this time, a condition for shifting from the ART ready state to the ART state may be set. Further, the pressing order may or may not be notified in the ART preparation state.

  Also, a plurality of ART states may be defined and each ART state may be transitioned. Furthermore, a plurality of types of “special replays” may be defined, and an ART state to be shifted may be determined according to the type of “special replay” that has been won. The ART state is different from the AT state in that it is not the internal middle state ST210.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an internal mode set in the effect control device 70 according to the embodiment of the present invention. There are three types of internal modes: normal A mode, normal B mode, and heaven mode. The number of game executions counted when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied is initialized and any internal mode is set. It is like that. Note that when the predetermined reset condition is satisfied, for example, when the AT state ST350 ends or when the special gaming state ST220 ends, the setting device 60 changes the setting or the RAM clear switch is operated. When the game is started after being broken, it is a case where the game is started after a reset operation which is a predetermined operation which can be executed by the player, instead of an operation of the RAM clear switch.

  In each internal mode, a game number zone, which is a zone divided by the number of game executions, is set. For each game number zone, a selection probability of a predetermined number of times (number of released games) for which the number of games is released (number of released games) is set. The winning probability (M lottery) of the transfer lottery to the mission zone ST320 is determined. When the reset condition is satisfied, first, the internal mode to be set is selected, and the specified number of times is determined according to the selection probability of the specified number of times that the number of games is released (G number release) in each game number zone specified in the selected internal mode. The specified number of times will be determined.

  When the normal A mode is selected, the probability that the specified number of times is selected in the game number zone of 151 to 200 games and 601 to 700 games is the highest, and then the specified number of times is selected in the game number zone of 351 to 400 games. There is a high probability. Therefore, for the player, the game number zones of 151 to 200 games and 601 to 700 games are the greatest chance zones that are most likely to be released, and then the game number zones of 351 to 400 games are released. It becomes a chance zone with high possibility. Note that the probability that the specified number of times is selected for other game number zones is not 0, and the specified number of times is set with a lower probability than the above-mentioned game number zones. Moreover, the maximum number of games that can be set as the prescribed number of times is 750, and the number of games is always canceled by 750 games. That is, in the normal A mode, the ceiling is 750 games.

  When the normal B mode is selected, the probability that the specified number of times is selected in the game number zones of 26 to 50 games and 351 to 400 games is the highest, and this game number zone is a large chance zone for the player. Next, there is a high probability that the specified number of times is selected in the game number zone of 151 to 200 games, the game number zone of 301 to 350 games, and the game number zone of 401 to 450 games, and this game number zone is a chance zone for the player. is there. Of course, the probability that the specified number of times is selected for other game number zones is not 0, and the specified number of times is set with a lower probability than the above-mentioned game number zone. Further, the maximum number of games that can be set as the prescribed number is 500 games, and the number of games is always canceled by 500 games. That is, in the normal B mode, the ceiling is 500 games. Note that, from the distribution of the probability that the ceiling value and the specified number of times are selected, the normal B mode is an internal mode that is more advantageous to the player than the normal A mode.

  When the heaven mode is selected, the probability that the specified number of times is selected in the game number zones of 1 to 25 games and 51 to 100 games is the highest, and this game number zone is a chance zone for the player. Of course, the probability that the specified number of times is selected for other game number zones is not 0, and the specified number of times is set with a lower probability than the above-mentioned game number zone. Further, the maximum number of games that can be set as the prescribed number of times is 100, and the number of games is always canceled by 100 games. That is, the ceiling is 100 games in the heaven mode. Note that the heaven mode is an internal mode that is more advantageous to the player than the normal B mode because of the distribution of the probability that the ceiling value and the specified number of times are selected.

  In addition, the winning probability (M lottery) of the transition lottery to the mission zone ST320 includes a low probability state (low accuracy) with a low probability, a high probability state (high accuracy) with a higher probability than the low probability state, and a high probability. For example, in the normal A mode, a low probability is set when the number of executions is 1 to 25 games, and the probability is 26 to 50 games. High probability is set in some cases.

  Even in the same internal mode, the distribution of the probability that the specified number of times that the number of games is canceled (G number cancellation) is selected in each game number zone may be different depending on the setting of the setting device 60 ( The higher the setting value, the smaller the specified number of times is selected). In addition, the winning probability of the AT right acquisition lottery (direct hit AT lottery) in the normal zone ST310 is a constant probability regardless of the internal mode, but this is also varied depending on the internal mode and the setting of the setting device 60. (The higher the set value, the higher the winning probability).

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of progress of a game in various cases according to the embodiment of the present invention. The case shown to (A)-(E) is demonstrated.

  FIG. 15A shows an example in the case of winning the AT right acquisition lottery (direct hit AT lottery) or the pseudo bonus right acquisition lottery (direct hit pseudo bonus lottery) in the normal zone ST310. In this example, the game has progressed in the normal zone ST310 after the game execution count has been cleared to 0, and the rare winning role that plays a specific role in the game in which the game execution count is 215 games is accompanied by this. Wins in the AT right acquisition lottery or pseudo bonus right acquisition lottery.

  Here, by winning the AT right acquisition lottery or the pseudo bonus right acquisition lottery, the remaining number of games until the number of games is released is set to 5 games including the game, and this number of games is released. Continuous production is performed in five games up to the game. Since the continuous effect here is a notification effect when the state transitions to the AT state ST350, the effect that the state transitions to the AT state ST350 is performed at the final stage of the continuous effect. For example, the player side disciple character confronts the teacher character, and the disciple character finally wins. Moreover, you may change the content of production according to the state to transfer.

  Then, the game number is canceled in the game in which the number of executions of the game is 220 games, the AT state ST350 is entered, and the normal AT state ST351 or the promoted lottery state ST360 is entered. Note that it may be considered that the number of executions has reached the specified number of times in the next game due to the winning of the AT right acquisition lottery, and the game moves from the next game winning in the AT right acquisition lottery to the AT state ST350.

  In the normal AT state ST351, a battle effect is performed in which the player's disciple character fights against various enemy characters. For example, the enemy character corresponding to the reel stop button 24 to be operated attacks the disciple character, and the player defeats the enemy character by operating the corresponding reel stop button 24, and assists the formation of a small role It is designed to produce a notification of the pressing order.

  On the other hand, in the promoted lottery state ST360, as in the normal AT state ST351, a battle effect in which the player's disciple character fights against various enemy characters is performed, but in the process of battle with the enemy character (ST361 to ST363) When the enemy character is defeated, the normal AT state ST351 is entered. If the transition to the normal AT state ST351 is not made, an effect of losing to the enemy character is executed, and control is performed so as to make a transition to the normal zone ST310 of the non-AT state ST300.

  FIG. 15B shows an example in which the number of games is released based on the number of times the game has been executed reaching the specified number, and the game number zone is not straddled while staying in the specific effect zone ST330. showed that. In this example, the prescribed number of times that the number of games is to be canceled is set to 180.

  After the number of executions of the game is cleared to 0, the game progresses in the normal zone ST310, and the transition condition is established by the start of the 165th game, which is 15 games before the predetermined number of games, and the continuous effect state of the specific effect zone ST330 In ST331, a continuous effect A over 10 games is performed. Then, from the 175th game, a continuous production state ST332 is entered, and a continuous production over five games is performed.

  Since the specific effect here is a notification effect in the case of shifting to the AT state ST350, an effect of shifting to the AT state ST350 is performed in the final stage of the continuous effect. For example, in the continuous performance A, a training performance is performed in which the player's disciple character performs training, and in the subsequent continuous performance, a confrontation effect in which the player's disciple character confronts the teacher character is performed. Since the process proceeds to ST350, an effect that the disciple character finally wins is performed. Thereafter, the number of games executed is 180 games, the number of games is canceled, the AT state ST350 is entered, and the game proceeds to the promoted lottery state ST360.

  FIG. 15C shows an example in which the number of games is released based on the number of times the game has been executed reaching the specified number, and the game number zone is straddled while staying in the specific effect zone ST330. It was. Also in this example, the progress and production of the game are the same as in the case of FIG. In this example, the specified number of times that the number of games is to be canceled is set to 360.

  After the number of executions of the game is cleared to 0, the game progresses in the normal zone ST310, and the transition condition is established by the start of the 345th game, which is 15 games before the specified number of games, and the continuous effect state of the specific effect zone ST330 In ST331, a continuous effect A over 10 games is performed. The game number zone to which the game to be transferred to the specific effect zone ST330 belongs is different from the game number zone to which the game having the specified number of times belongs, but can be transferred to the specific effect zone ST330 without being particularly limited thereto.

  And from 355th game, it becomes continuous production | generation state ST332, and the continuous production over 5 games is performed. Since the specific effect here is a notification effect in the case of shifting to the AT state ST350, an effect of shifting to the AT state ST350 is performed in the final stage of the continuous effect. Thereafter, the number of games executed is 360 games, the number of games is canceled, the AT state ST350 is entered, and the game proceeds to the promoted lottery state ST360.

  In FIG. 15D, the specific effect is performed by winning the lottery for the transition to the specific effect zone ST330 before the predetermined number of times (the number of executions of the specific effect) that reaches the specified number of times. Thereafter, an example of winning the AT right acquisition lottery in the mission zone ST320 is shown.

  After the number of executions of the game is cleared to 0, the game progresses in the normal zone ST310, and at the 165th game, the lottery for the transition to the specific effect zone ST330 is won, and the continuous effect state ST331 of the specific effect zone ST330 is obtained. Continuous production A is performed. And from 175th game, it becomes continuous production | generation state ST332, the continuous production over 5 games is performed, and a specific production is complete | finished.

  Since the specific effect here is a gasse effect when not transitioning to the AT state ST350, an effect that the transition to the AT state ST350 is not performed is performed at the final stage of the continuous effect. For example, in the continuous performance A, a training performance is performed in which the player's disciple character performs training, and in the subsequent continuous performance, a confrontation effect in which the player's disciple character confronts the teacher character is performed. Since the process does not proceed to ST350, an effect that the disciple character eventually loses is performed. Thereafter, the game returns to the normal zone ST310 from the 180th game. In addition, it is good also considering the continuous production when not transfering to normal AT state ST351 as the number of games less than five games.

  Furthermore, the game progresses in the normal zone ST310, and in the 230th game, a transition lottery to the mission zone ST320 is won and the game moves to the mission zone ST320. This mission zone ST320 continues over 7 games, and a continuous effect B is performed as an effect. During the mission zone ST320, the AT right acquisition lottery is won, and when the mission zone ST320 ends, the AT state ST350 is entered and the normal AT state ST351 is entered. For example, in the continuation effect B, a mission skill acquisition mission for the player's disciple character to acquire the special technique is performed, and here, since the process shifts to the AT state ST350, an effect that finally succeeds in acquiring the special technique is performed.

  FIG. 15E shows an example when the ceiling is reached. In this example, the internal mode selected when the number of executions of the game is cleared to 0 is the normal A mode, and 750 which is the maximum as the prescribed number is selected.

  After the number of executions of the game is cleared to 0, the game progresses in the normal zone ST310, and the transition lottery to the mission zone ST320 is won at the 536th game and the game moves to the mission zone ST320. This mission zone ST320 continues for 10 games, and a continuation effect B is performed as an effect. During the mission zone ST320, the AT right acquisition lottery is not won, and the game returns to the normal zone ST310 from the 546th game with the end of the mission zone ST320. For example, in the continuation effect B, a mission skill acquisition mission is performed in which the player's disciple character aims to acquire the special technique, and here, since the process does not shift to the AT state ST350, an effect that finally fails to acquire the special technique is performed.

  After that, in the 608th game, the lottery for the transition to the specific effect zone ST330 is won, and the continuous effect state ST331 of the specific effect zone ST330 is obtained, and the continuous effect A for 10 games is performed. And from 618th game, it becomes continuous production | generation state ST332, the continuous production over 4 games is performed, and a specific production is complete | finished. Since the specific effect here is a gasse effect when not transitioning to the AT state ST350, an effect that the transition to the AT state ST350 is not performed is performed at the final stage of the continuous effect. Thereafter, the game returns to the normal zone ST310 from the 622th game. For example, in the continuous performance A, a training performance is performed in which the player's disciple character performs training, and in the subsequent continuous performance, a confrontation effect in which the player's disciple character confronts the teacher character is performed. Since the process does not proceed to ST350, an effect that the disciple character eventually loses is performed.

  And the continuous production over 5 games is started by the start of the 745th game which is 5 games before the game of the specified number of times. Since the specific effect here is a notification effect in the case of shifting to the AT state ST350, an effect of shifting to the AT state ST350 is performed in the final stage of the continuous effect. For example, in the continuous production, a confrontation production is performed in which the player's disciple character confronts the teacher character. Here, since the transition is made to the AT state ST350, the disciple character finally wins. Thereafter, the number of games executed is 750 games, the number of games is canceled, the AT state ST350 is entered, and the normal AT state ST351 is entered.

  The number of games is canceled by reaching the number of games that will be the ceiling, and the state shifts to the AT state ST350, but is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined role condition is satisfied after the game that has reached the ceiling number of games (such as a bell spilling over the push order bell or winning a predetermined specific role), the continuous effect starts. It may be made to shift to AT state ST350 with the end. In addition, when the number of games serving as the ceiling is reached, the continuous production is started without going through the continuous production, but the continuous production may be started through the continuous production.

  Next, processing by the game control device 50 will be described. The process by the game control device 50 includes a game control process (see FIG. 16) for overall control of the game, and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) performed every predetermined time (for example, about every 2 msec).

[Game control processing]
First, the game control process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game control processing according to the embodiment of the present invention. The game control process is performed when the game machine 50 is turned on when the slot machine 1 is turned on, and the CPU 50a reads and executes the control program for the game control process stored in the ROM 50b. Be started.

  When the game control process is started, the game control device 50 first executes a power-on process for initializing a register in the CPU 50a, initializing game data stored in the RAM 50c, and the like (step A1001). .

  Next, the game control device 50 sets (bets) a bet number by a betting operation (that is, a medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 15 or an input from a credit) or an automatic betting operation based on establishment of a replay 1 winning, A bet number / credit number control process for transmitting a bet number command to the effect control device 70 is executed (step A1002). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the payout button 20 has been operated. When it is determined that the payout button 20 has been operated, the payout of medals set (inserted) as a bet amount and the medal stored as credits are performed. Then, the medal clearing process for transmitting the clearing command to the effect control device 70 is executed (step A1003).

  Then, the game control device 50 determines whether or not the bet (betting) number is an upper limit value (for example, 3 in the normal gaming state and 2 in the special gaming state (during bonus)) (step A1004). If the number of bets has not reached the upper limit (the result of step A1004 is “N”), the process returns to step A1002. If the number of bets has reached the upper limit (the result of step A1004 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the start lever 21 has been operated (step A1005).

  When the start lever 21 is not operated (the result of step A1005 is “N”), the game control device 50 returns to the process of step A1002. When the start lever 21 is operated (the result of step A1005 is “Y”), the replay flag set based on the establishment of the replay winning is cleared (step A1006), and the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) ) 93 is operated to set a medal insertion prohibition operation for converting to a insertion restriction state in which a medal cannot be inserted (step A1007).

  After that, the game control device 50 performs an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery for a winning combination according to the gaming state and transmitting a lottery result command corresponding to the lottery result to the effect control device 70 (step A1008). In addition, the operation of the reel stop button 24 for deriving the stop result is invalidated for a predetermined time, or the freeze effect is executed based on the internal lottery result as a setting related to the freeze effect that delays the end of the game. A freeze effect setting process for managing the number of games until the freeze effect is executed (step A1009).

  Next, the game control device 50 executes a reel rotation start process for executing the set freeze effect or setting the fluctuation start (rotation start) of the reel 6 (step A1010). Further, a reel rotation stop process is performed to perform a process related to stop (rotation stop) of the variable display of each reel 6 based on the winning winning flag set based on the result of the internal lottery and the operation timing of the reel stop button 24 (step) A1011).

  Then, the game control device 50 displays a stop display on the active line based on the reel position information (specifically, the rotation phase of the reel 6 detected by the reel position detection switch 54) from the reel position detection switch 54. The winning combination is determined by determining whether or not the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning winning flag is determined, and a winning determination process for setting payout number information when the winning is achieved is executed. (Step A1012).

  Thereafter, the game control device 50 executes payout control processing (granting processing) for adding credits or paying out medals by the medal payout device 63 based on the payout number information (step A1013). A game state update process for controlling the transition of the game state (normal state, special game state (BB state), internal middle state (RT state)) shown in (A) is executed (step A1014). Note that not a single game is performed from the reel rotation start process until the reel rotation stop process is completed, but one game is performed from the end of the process of step A1013 or step A1014. Note that the game control device 50 serves as a grant processing means for executing a payout control process (grant process).

  Finally, the game control device 50 cancels the medal insertion prohibition operation by operating the state conversion solenoid 938 to convert the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 to the insertion allowable state in which the medal can be inserted (step). A1015), the process returns to step A1002.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment of this invention. When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 50 first executes a register saving process for transferring a value held in a predetermined register to the RAM 50c (step A1101). Further, input processing for reading input from various sensors, that is, reading the state of each input port is executed (step A1102).

  Inputs acquired in the input process in step A1102 are a medal insertion detector 922, a medal acquisition detector 925, a start lever switch 52, a reel stop switch 53 (first reel (left) stop switch 53a, second reel (middle)). Stop switch 53b, third reel (right) stop switch 53c), reel position detection switch 54 (left reel position detection switch 54a, middle reel position detection switch 54b, right reel position detection switch 54c), max bet switch 57, payout button These are inputs from the switch 58, the payout medal detection switch 59, the setting device 60, the reset switch 61, the door opening / closing detection switch 62, the radio wave detection switch 81, the medal full switch 82, the setting device 60, and the like.

  Next, as processing related to security, when the input from the medal insertion detector 922 is an input indicating abnormality, the game control device 50 performs processing corresponding to this, or issues a medal insertion error command to the effect control device 70. Or a medal insertion error monitoring process to be transmitted to (step A1103). Furthermore, a radio wave error monitoring process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the case where abnormal radio wave irradiation is detected based on the input from the radio wave detection switch 81, or to transmit a radio wave fraud command to the effect control device 70 (step). A1104), the door opening monitoring process for monitoring the state of the front door 2 based on the input from the door opening / closing detection switch 62 and transmitting a door opening command or a door closing command to the effect control device 70 according to the opening / closing of the front door 2. Is executed (step A1105).

  Next, the game control device 50 monitors the occurrence of a power failure, and executes a power-off process that performs a predetermined process when the power failure occurs (step A1106). As a process when a power failure occurs, for example, after stopping paying out medals, backing up information in the RAM 50c, storing a stack pointer, storing a checksum, etc., until the RAM access is prohibited and the power of the slot machine 1 is shut off stand by. If a power failure has not occurred, the power-off process (step A1106) is not executed, and the next reel operation control process is executed (step A1107).

  In the reel operation control process (step A1107), the output of rotation and stop of the reel 6 is set based on the freeze information and the reel update information set when the freeze effect is performed. Thereafter, the game control device 50 executes timer update processing for updating various timers (step A1108), and executes branch processing according to the process number (step A1109).

  When the process number is “0” in the process of step A1109, the game control device 50 monitors whether the medals in the hopper of the medal payout device 63 are full based on the input from the medal full switch 82. A full switch monitoring process is executed (step A1110). If the processing number is “1” in the process of step A1109, an abnormality in the medal payout is monitored based on the input from the payout medal detection switch 59. If there is an abnormality, the payout switch is sent to the effect control device 70. A payout medal detection switch error monitoring process for transmitting an error command is executed (step A1111).

  When the process number is “2” in the process of step A1109, the game control device 50 displays the game progress display unit 12, the bet number display unit 19, the credit number display unit 11, the payout number display unit 13, and the game state display unit. LED / 7-segment control processing for controlling display at 18 is executed (step A1112). If the process number is “3” in the process of step A1109, an external information editing process for editing information output to an external device such as a hall computer is executed (step A1113).

  After executing the process corresponding to the process number, the game control device 50 performs the effect control device 70, the credit number display unit 11, the game progress display unit 12, and the payout number display unit 13 based on the output data set in various processes. , Game state display unit 18, bet number display unit 19, medal payout device 63, reel motor 64 (left reel motor 64a, middle reel motor 64b, right reel motor 64c), external signal output terminal (the slot machine concerned) 1 (terminal connected to a management device provided separately from 1) 33, the state conversion solenoid 938, etc., output processing for outputting control signals is executed (step A 1114). Then, the interrupt request is cleared (step A1115), the register is restored (step A1116), the interrupt is permitted (step A1117), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Internal lottery processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process according to the embodiment of the present invention. The internal lottery process is executed at step A1008 of the game control process shown in FIG. Note that, during the internal lottery process, an input of various operations such as a betting operation and a reel 6 stop operation is not accepted and is invalidated.

  When the internal lottery process is started, the game control device 50 first acquires a combination lottery random number for determining a winning combination from the random number generator 50e (step A1201). Further, a winning / winning determination table corresponding to the current gaming state is set (step A1202).

  Next, the game control device 50 determines whether or not the prize has been won internally based on the random value acquired in the process of step A1201 and the winning prize determination table set in the process of step A1202. Processing is executed (step A1203). Thereby, the game control apparatus 50 makes a part lottery means. In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the prize has been won internally using a random value generated by the random number generator 50e, that is, a hardware random number generated by hardware. It is not limited. For example, it may be configured to determine whether an internal winning winning is made based on a soft random number generated by software. Alternatively, one may be determined based on a hard random number and the other may be determined based on a soft random number.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the winning winning flags corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations in duplicate. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the winning combinations that can be duplicated according to the embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the replay winning combination, (B) shows the Bell A winning combination, and (C) shows the winning combination that can be duplicated with the Bell B winning combination.

  As shown in (A), when a replay winning combination is won, it is not duplicated, or “Pseudo Bonus Lip 1”, “Pseudo Bonus Lip 2”, and “Pseudo Bonus Lip 3” are won. In addition, when the replay winning combination is won in combination with a small role such as a bell, the replay winning combination is given priority, and therefore it corresponds to “no duplication”. When the pseudo bonus lip winning combination is won, as described above, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (non-AT state) to the specific gaming state (AT state).

  In addition, as shown in (B) or (C), the Bell A winning combination or the Bell B winning combination is overlapped with a single combination A or single combination B that does not overlap. That is, in this embodiment, when the stop button is stopped (pressed in order) from the left, it is set so that there is no overlap or a single winning combination is established.

Now, the description returns to the flowchart of the internal lottery process in FIG. When the winning / winning determination process ends, the game control device 50 sets a lose winning flag (step A1204), and determines whether or not the determination result obtained in the winning / winning determination process in step A1203 is a winning winning ( Step A1205).
If the determination result obtained in the winning / winning determination process is not a winning / winning determination (the result of Step A1205 is “N”), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to Step A1207. If the determination result obtained in the winning / winning determination process is a winning / winning result (the result of step A1205 is “Y”), the winning combination flag set in the process of step A1204 is replaced with an internal winning winning. The corresponding winning winning flag is set (step A1206), and the process proceeds to step A1207.

  The game control device 50 transmits a lottery result command corresponding to the winning flag (losing winning flag or winning winning flag) set in step A1204 or step A1206 to the effect control device 70 (step A1207). Finally, stop information setting processing for setting stop information (stop control table) for stopping the symbol corresponding to the winning winning flag on the active line is executed (step A1208), and the internal lottery processing is terminated.

[Winning determination process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of winning determination processing according to the embodiment of this invention. The winning determination process is executed in step A1012 of the game control process shown in FIG.

  When the winning determination process is started, the game control device 50 first acquires reel stop information which is information indicating the stopped reel 6 and its stop position (step A1301), and a winning is established according to the gaming state. Determination information is set (step A1302). Next, the number of effective lines (1 in this embodiment) is set (step A1303), the effective line to be determined is set (step A1304), and a winning symbol (a symbol combination mode corresponding to any winning combination) It is determined whether there is any (step A1305).

  When there is no winning symbol (the result of step A1305 is “N”), the game control device 50 proceeds to the process of step A1309. On the other hand, if there is a winning symbol (the result of step A1305 is “Y”), it is determined whether the winning symbol matches the winning winning flag (step A1306).

  When the winning symbol does not match the winning winning flag (the result of Step A1306 is “N”), the game control device 50 executes a non-recoverable error process (Step A1313). In the non-recoverable error process, an error notification for encouraging inspection is performed, and the reset is not performed unless a reset button operation or a reset operation such as RAM clear is performed. On the other hand, if they match (the result of step A1306 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not a replay winning is established (step A1307).

  When the replay winning is established (the result of step A1307 is “Y”), the game control device 50 sets the automatic bet re-game flag (step A1314), and the replay winning determined in the process of step A1307 is the bell lip. It is determined whether or not it is a win (step A1315).

  Then, in the case of a bell lip winning (the result of step A1315 is “Y”), the game control device 50 sets a manual bet re-game flag instead of the automatic bet re-game flag (step A1316). Transition to processing. Since the Bellip winning combination is a winning combination that can be won in combination with the bonus winning, it is possible to suggest that there is a possibility that a bonus may be won by allowing the player to bet manually by the Bellip winning combination. it can. In the case of manual bet replay, the freeze effect is terminated (canceled) by executing a freeze effect for a long time and operating the max bet button 17 or operating the start lever twice. It has become. Therefore, when the manual bet replay flag is set, an automatic bet is made when the freeze effect is ended midway or when the freeze effect period elapses.

  On the other hand, the game control device 50 skips the process of step A1316 and proceeds to the process of step A1317 if the result is not a bell lip winning (the result of step A1315 is “N”).

  Further, when the replay winning is not established (the result of Step A1307 is “N”), the game control device 50 adds the number of payouts corresponding to the winning symbol to the payout counter (Step A1308), and receives the winning determination result information. Store (step A1309). Thereafter, it is determined whether all active lines have been determined (step A1310). If not determined (the result of step A1310 is “N”), the process returns to step A1304 to determine an undecided active line. To do. On the other hand, if all the active lines have been determined (the result of step A1310 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the set number of payouts exceeds the maximum number of payouts (for example, 15) in one game (step 15). A1311).

  When the maximum number of payouts is not exceeded (the result of Step A1311 is “N”), the game control device 50 proceeds to the process of Step A1317. If the maximum payout number is exceeded (the result of step A1311 is “Y”), the maximum payout number is set in the payout counter (step A1312). Then, a game result command corresponding to the winning determination result information is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step A1317), and the winning determination process is terminated.

[Medal insertion error monitoring process]
Next, a medal insertion error monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of an error when a medal is inserted will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of medal insertion error monitoring processing according to the embodiment of this invention. The medal insertion error monitoring process is executed in step A1103 of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. In the medal insertion error monitoring process, a state in which a medal inserted by the player from the medal insertion slot 15 is detected in the medal flow path of the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 and is notified.

  The game control device 50 first determines whether or not the detection switch 1 (925a) of the medal take-in detector 925 is turned on, that is, whether or not a medal passed by the detection switch 1 (925a) is detected ( Step A1401). When the detection switch 1 (925a) is OFF (the result of Step A1401 is “N”), the process proceeds to Step A1404.

  On the other hand, when the detection switch 1 (925a) is ON (the result of Step A1401 is “Y”), the game control device 50 adds 1 to the passage count (Step A1402), and a passage monitoring timer (for example, 200 ms) Is set (A1403).

  Next, the game control device 50 determines whether the detection switch 2 (925b) of the medal take-in detector 925 has changed from ON to OFF, that is, the medal flow path 939 in front of the detection switch 2 (925b) is turned on. It is determined whether or not a medal has passed (step A1404). If the detection switch 2 (925b) has not changed from ON to OFF (the result of Step A1404 is “N”), the medal inserted through the medal flow path 939 has not passed, and therefore the process of Step A1411 is performed. Transition.

  On the other hand, when the detection switch 2 (925b) is changed from ON to OFF (the result of Step A1404 is “N”), the game control device 50 determines that the medal inserted in the medal flow path 939 is the detection switch 2 (925b). It is confirmed that the vehicle has passed in front of (), and 1 is subtracted from the passage count (step A1405).

  Further, the game control device 50 determines whether or not the passage count is less than 0 (A1406). The passage count is incremented by 1 when the passage of a medal inserted by the detection switch 1 (925a) is detected, and is subtracted by 1 when the passage of a medal inserted by the detection switch 2 (925b) is detected. If it passes normally, it is set to 0. That is, if it is determined in step A1406 that the passage count is less than 0 (the result of step A1406 is “Y”), an abnormality has occurred, and selector error error notification is started (step A1407). . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A1411.

  On the other hand, when the passing count is not less than 0 (the result of A1406 is “Y”), the game control device 50 adds 1 to the medal take-in flag (step A1408). Further, it is determined whether or not the passage count is 0, that is, whether or not a medal has been inserted normally (step A1409). If the passage count is 0 (the result of step A1409 is “Y”), the medal has been inserted normally, and the passage monitoring timer is cleared (step A1410). If the passage count is not 0 (the result of step A1409 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1411.

  When the check of the values of the detection switch 1 (925a) and the detection switch 2 (925b) is completed, the game control device 50 determines whether or not the passage count is greater than 0 (step A1411). If the passage count is not as large as 0 (the result of step A1411 is “N”), this process ends.

  On the other hand, the game control device 50 decrements the passage monitoring timer by -1 when the passage count is as large as 0 (the result of step A1411 is "Y"). In this case, after the detection switch 1 (925a) is set to ON, the detection switch 2 (925b) does not change from ON to OFF, and the inserted medal is not passing. In the present embodiment, when a medal inserted before the passage monitoring timer becomes 0 passes the front of the detection switch 2 (925b), it is determined that it is operating normally.

  Subsequently, the game control device 50 determines whether or not the passage monitoring timer has expired (step A1413). If the time is not up (the result of step A1413 is “N”), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (the result of step A1413 is “Y”), the medal is jammed between the detection switch 1 (925a) and the detection switch 2 (925b), so that the selector clogging error is notified. Is started (step A1414).

  Here, a specific example of the selector clogging error will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining a situation in which medal clogging occurs in the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 in the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game is started by the start operation, the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 returns a state in which the medals are distributed to the return port 931 from the state in which the medals are taken in and bet. Migrate to On the other hand, when the game is finished, for example, when the payout process is finished, the state shifts from the return state to the capture state.

  In the take-in state, as shown in FIG. 8A, the upper guide portion 933 of the flow path switching member 932 is positioned above the medal flow path 939 so as to be parallel to the medal flow path 939. On the other hand, in the return state, as shown in FIG. 8B, the arm portion 935 rotates clockwise about the rotation shaft 936, and the restriction piece 934 formed on the flow path switching member 932 moves the medal flow. By projecting to the path 939, the inserted medal is not taken in and flows down to the return port 931.

  By the way, when a medal is inserted from the insertion slot during execution of the payout process and the payout process is completed while the medal flows down the medal flow path 939 and the state shifts from the return state to the take-in state, FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that the medal flowing down by the upper guide portion 933 is caught by the rotation of the flow path switching member 932 and the medal clogging occurs.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the process of returning from the return state to the take-in state, the flow path switching member 932 rotates counterclockwise, so that the medal tilted by the restriction piece 934 The side surface comes into contact with the upper guide portion 933 and is sandwiched between the medal flow path 939.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 22A, the detection switch 1 (925a) of the medal take-in detector 925 detects a medal, and the detection switch 2 (925b) does not detect the medal. The flow stops.

  Such a clogged medal is a player who has not recognized the winning of a single combination A / B (second winning combination), which is difficult to recognize from the reels that the winning has been established. However, this tends to occur when a medal is inserted during the payout process when the game is not finished. On the other hand, for a winning combination (first winning combination) other than the single winning combination A / B, the same symbol is stopped after being aligned with an active line or a symbol aligning line, or stopped at a specific position at a predetermined position. , Making it easier for players to recognize.

  Next, processing by the effect control device 70 will be described. The process by the effect control device 70 includes an effect control process (see FIG. 23) for comprehensively controlling the effect, and a timer interruption process (see FIG. 24) performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, approximately every 2 msec).

[Production control processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect control process according to the embodiment of the present invention. In the effect control process, when the power of the effect control device 70 is turned on when the slot machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 70a reads out and executes the control program of the effect control process stored in the ROM 70b. Be started.

  When the production control process is started, the production control device 70 first executes a regular production information setting process (step B1001). The regular effect is an effect that is executed at a predetermined time, and for example, a special mode is generated every two hours from when the power is turned on. The regular production information setting process is a process for setting the time when the power is turned on and determining the production content in order to execute the regular production. Details of the regular effect information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 70 initializes a register in the CPU 70a, initializes game data stored in the RAM 70c, and notifies power-on / recovery based on a power-on / recovery command from the game control device 50. An initialization / initial setting process for performing processing and the like is executed (step B1002).

  Next, when the game has not been executed for a predetermined time, the effect control device 70 displays a customer-waiting demo image and / or an energy-saving image in which the brightness of the display is reduced more than usual on the main display 3 and the sub-display 310. The customer waiting process to be executed is executed (step B1003). It should be noted that the sub-display 310 may be provided with a display (for example, “pachinko / pachislot is something that can be enjoyed moderately”) for suppressing excessive gaming (shooting happiness).

  In the waiting-for-customer process, the production mode change screen is displayed by operating the production buttons while the customer waiting screen is displayed, and the production modes are changed in order of A⇒B⇒C every time the production button 10 is operated. Change with. However, the change of the production mode is regulated from the predetermined period before the regular production until the end of the regular production.

  The effect control device 70 executes support menu processing for displaying game result history information such as a special winning combination occurrence history on the sub-display 310 based on a browsing operation by the operation input unit 30 (step B1004). . Details of the support menu processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  Further, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the game has been started (step B1005). The start of the game is determined by receiving a lottery result command (game start information). When the game has not started (the result of step B1005 is “N”), the effect control device 70 returns to the waiting for customer process (step B1003).

  On the other hand, when the game is started (the result of step B1005 is “Y”), the production control device 70 sets information for managing the occurrence of the specific gaming state by the number of executed games. Is executed (step B1006). In the game management information setting process, the occurrence of the AT state ST350 (specific game state) (the number of games released), and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the mission zone ST320 (low probability state, high probability state, super high probability state) Is set by managing the number of times the game is executed. For example, setting of the internal mode and setting of the prescribed number of times for releasing the number of games are performed. Information for managing the occurrence of the specific gaming state by the number of executed games is determined when the start lever 21 is operated. Details of the game management information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Further, the effect control device 70 executes a game progress management process for managing the progress of the game (step B1007). Specifically, the management of the number of executed games, the mission state, the promoted lottery state, the pseudo bonus state (special AT state), the normal AT state, and the occurrence and progress of the added AT state are managed (controlled).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 executes a pseudo bonus lottery process for drawing whether or not to generate a pseudo bonus state based on the internal lottery result when the gaming state is the non-AT state ST300 (step B1008). Details of the pseudo bonus lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 70 performs a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process for lottering whether or not the type of the pseudo bonus is promoted (ranked up) based on the promotion lottery mode and the internal lottery result when the gaming state is the promotion lottery state ST360. Is executed (step B1009). Details of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the gaming state is the non-AT state ST300, the effect control device 70 executes a mission lottery process for lottery whether or not to generate a mission state based on the internal lottery result (step B1010). Further, in the case of the normal zone ST310 or the mission zone ST320, an AT generation lottery process for lottering the loop rate of the normal AT state ST351 when shifting to the AT state ST350 based on the internal lottery result is executed (step) B1011).

  Next, in the normal AT state ST351 and the additional AT state ST352, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not to increase the number of AT games based on the internal lottery result, and the number of AT games for lottery of the additional method (type of addition). An extra lottery process is executed (step B1012). In the added AT state ST352, it is easier to add the number of AT games, and an addition method having a larger number of added games is set to be easily selected.

  Further, the effect control device 70 executes the lottery process for adding the number of AT sets for lottery in the case of the normal AT state ST351 and the added AT state ST352, based on the internal lottery result to determine whether or not to add the number of AT sets (step B1013). . In the case of the added AT state ST352, it is added with higher probability.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 executes a freeze effect process for executing an effect corresponding to the freeze effect when performing the freeze effect (step B1014). Next, in accordance with the winning of a special prize or a small role prize, and a game state, a game effect determination process is performed for performing a single effect performed only for the game or a continuous notice (continuous effect) continuously performed over a plurality of games. (Step B1015).

  Next, the production control device 70 does not stop counting the number of executed games or perform a predetermined inter-game mission lottery when the middle / right first stop operation is performed when the specific gaming state does not occur. An anomaly push penalty setting process for giving a penalty is executed (step B1016). The penalty may be given only on the condition that the irregular push is executed, but in addition to the execution of the irregular push, the fact that the winning of the predetermined winning combination is established as a result of the irregular push being executed. It may be a condition.

  Thereafter, the effect control device 70 executes the irregular push penalty setting process of step B1016 until the game is over (step B1017). When the game is over (the result of step B1017 is “N”), a game management information update process for updating information for managing the occurrence of the specific gaming state by the number of executed games is executed (step B1018). In the game management information update process, for example, setting of an internal mode or setting of a prescribed number of times for canceling the number of games is performed.

  In the game management information setting process (step B1006), a process is performed when the internal mode information prior to the reset process is not taken into consideration regarding the internal mode setting. In this case, when the game is started after changing the setting by the setting device 60, or when the game is started after the operation of the RAM clear switch is performed, the player can execute instead of the operation of the RAM clear switch. The case where the game is started after a reset operation which is a predetermined operation is included. On the other hand, in the game management information update process (step B1018), a process is performed in consideration of the internal mode information before the reset process regarding the setting of the internal mode. In this case, the case where the AT state ST350 is finished and the case where the special game state ST220 is finished are included.

  Finally, the effect control device 70 executes a history information storage process for storing the game result as history information (step B1018), and returns to the customer waiting effect process in step B1013.

  In addition, when a power failure occurs, a power-off process is performed to perform processing when the power failure occurs. As a process when a power failure occurs, for example, after backing up information in the RAM 70c, storing a stack pointer, a checksum, and the like, the RAM access is prohibited and the power to the slot machine 1 is cut off.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment of this invention.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the effect control device 70 first saves the value held in a predetermined register in the RAM 70c (step B1101). Subsequently, an input process for processing a signal input to the effect control device 70 from the effect button switch 10a and the operation input unit switch 30c is executed (step B1102).

  Next, the effect control device 70 executes a bet amount notification process for notifying the bet amount (sound, display, light emission) based on the bet number command transmitted every time the bet number is updated (step B1103). In the betting number notification process, for example, a sound is output every time a medal is inserted.

  Further, the effect control device 70 executes a settlement notification process for performing notification (sound, display, light emission) that the settlement has been performed based on the settlement command (step B1104). In the settlement notification process, for example, a sound is output every time a credited medal is discharged, or an alarm sound is output for a predetermined time (for example, settlement time + 5 seconds).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 executes a normal effect control process for controlling a single effect performed only in the game according to the winning of a special prize or a small role prize, and the game state (step B1105). Further, a continuous effect control process for controlling a continuous notice (continuous effect) in which a notice (effect) is continuously executed over a plurality of games is executed (step B1106). Details of the continuous effect control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 70 executes a pseudo bonus promotion effect control process for controlling the effect in the promotion lottery state ST360 (step B1107). The effects in the promotion lottery state ST360 include, for example, a promotion effect when winning a lottery that promotes (changes) the value (type) of the pseudo bonus state. Details of the pseudo bonus promotion effect control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the game result includes payout, the effect control device 70 executes payout notification control processing for notifying (sound, display, light emission) of payout based on a payout command transmitted for each payout (step) B1108). Details of the payout notification control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the production control device 70 executes a regular production control process that compares the current time with the execution start time of the regular production, executes the regular production, or controls the regular production being executed (step) B1109).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 executes display control processing for controlling display on the main display 3 and the sub display 310 (step B1110). Furthermore, a sound control process (step B1111) for controlling sound output from the speaker 4, a frame light emitting device 7, a backlight 67, and a stop button LED 66 provided on reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c) as stop buttons are provided. A lamp / LED control process to be controlled is executed (step B1112).

  Thereafter, the effect control device 70 executes a random number update process for updating (for example, +1) a random number such as an effect random number used when determining the effect contents of the game (step B1113). And the output process which outputs the control signal based on the information set by various processes is performed (step B1114). Further, the interrupt request is cleared (step B1115), the register is restored (step B1116), the interrupt is permitted (step B1117), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Regular production]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the regular effect information setting process according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the initialization switch signal is on (step B1201). The initialization switch signal is input when the RAM is forcibly cleared by operating an initialization switch provided in the power supply device 40.

  When the initialization switch signal is on (the result of step B1201 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 clears the reference date information for executing the regular effect (step B1210). Further, a regular production invalid flag for invalidating the regular production is stored in the RAM 70c (step B1211). Finally, the regular effect invalid notification information is set (step B1212), and the regular effect information setting process is terminated. Note that the reference date information is information used for determining the production mode of the regular production.

  On the other hand, if the initialization switch signal is not on (the result of step B1201 is “N”), the performance control device 70 determines whether or not the reference date information for executing the regular performance is stored. (Step B1202). If the reference date information is not stored (the result of step B1202 is “N”), the date information obtained from the RTC (real time clock, timekeeping IC) not shown in FIG. 9 is used as the reference date. Information is stored in the RAM 70c (step B1203). The reference date information is newly stored when the power is turned on for the first time after the RAM is cleared. Further, the regular production invalid flag for invalidating the regular production is cleared (step B1204).

  The effect control device 70 acquires the date information from the RTC after the reference date information is set or when the reference date information is stored (the result of step B1202 is “Y”). (Step B1205). The date information is a date (year / month / day) and time. Note that the RCT is supplied with backup power from a backup power source (battery or capacitor), and even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped, the date information can be updated over a predetermined period. Yes.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 determines the regular effect mode based on the reference date information and the date information acquired in the process of step B1205, and stores it in the RAM 711 (step B1206). The aspect is determined based on the number of days that have elapsed since the reference date. An example of a table for determining the regular effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 26A.

  FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of a regular effect mode determination table for determining the mode of the regular effect according to the embodiment of the present invention. The regular performance of this embodiment is determined based on the number of days that have elapsed since the reference date. As the reference date, the time when the power is first turned on after the RAM is cleared is set.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26A, the mode of the regular production is switched from production A to production F every two weeks, and after 12 weeks, production A to production F is sequentially executed for each regular production. It has become. After 12 weeks, the player may be able to select the effect F from the effect A, or the player may be able to determine (customize) the effect for each regular effect.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of the regular effect information setting process of FIG. The production control device 70 determines the execution time of the regular production based on the date / time information acquired in the process of step B1205, and stores it in the execution information storage area of the RAM 711 (step B1207). An example of the execution information storage area for storing the execution time of the regular effects will be described with reference to FIG. 26B.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of the content of the execution information storage area for the regular effects according to the embodiment of this invention. In the execution information storage area of the regular production, the number of regular productions indicating the execution times of the regular production, the execution time corresponding to the number of regular productions, and the production mode to be executed are stored. In FIG. 26B, the information is stored with the power-on time being 09: 00: 1.28 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the number of regular effects is six times a day, but the number may be reduced depending on the power-on time. The execution time is updated every time the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the execution time is defined to be executed every two hours with reference to the time when the power is turned on. The execution time is determined and stored in the process of step B1206. Since all the RAMs cannot be cleared at the same time, the power is turned on at the same time based on the time when the power is turned on, rather than making settings related to regular effects when the RAM is cleared. Further, it is possible to perform regular effects so as to synchronize with a plurality of gaming machines (same model).

  Further, the effect mode is determined by the process of step B1206 based on the date information. It should be noted that the production mode of each regular production is not determined uniquely according to the number of days elapsed from the reference date, but the production mode executed at each regular production by operating the production button 10 when waiting for a customer. May be arbitrarily set (customized) by the player. In addition, when making a player arbitrarily set (customize), you may make it select from the aspect of execution performed in the past, and a player's personal game history (game frequency, mission achievement level, etc.) ) May be selected according to the production mode.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of the regular effect information setting process of FIG. Finally, the production control device 70 sets the regular production effective notification information (step B1208), and ends the regular production information setting process. Note that the regular effect valid notification information set in the process of step B1208 and the regular effect invalid notification information set in the process of step B1212 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of the regular effect notification information according to the embodiment of the present invention, where (A) is the regular effect invalid notification information and (B) is the regular effect effective notification information.

  The regular production invalidity notification information is displayed when the RAM clear is executed (initialization switch signal is input), and specifically, is displayed after the execution of the regular production information setting process or when the power-on command is received. The

  The regular effect valid notification information is displayed when the power is restored without executing the RAM clear (normal recovery at the time of power failure), or when all the models are turned on at the same time. Displayed after the performance information setting process is executed or when a power failure recovery command is received.

[Support menu display hierarchy]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the contents of the menu screen and the display hierarchy displayed on the sub-display unit 310 according to the embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, when the operation input unit 30 or the effect button 10 is operated in a state where a bet (setting of the bet number) is not performed, the sub-display 310 displays the lower end position (operation input) of the liquid crystal display window 9d. First, the support menu screen of the first display hierarchy is displayed.

  Selectable items are displayed on the support menu screen. When the player performs an operation of selecting an item and determining the selection, a screen of the second display hierarchy corresponding to the selected item is displayed. Similarly, selectable items are also displayed on the screen of the second display hierarchy. When the player selects an item and performs an operation of determining the selection, the screen of the third display hierarchy corresponding to the selected item Is displayed.

  On the support menu screen of the first display hierarchy, items of game description, game history, mobile link (game log), and production customization are displayed. For example, the player selects an item of the game history and determines the selection. When the operation is performed, the game history screen of the second display hierarchy is displayed. On the game history screen of the second display hierarchy, items for winning probability display, slump graph display, game number reset setting, and setting reset release are displayed. For example, the player selects an item for game number reset setting and When an operation for determining the selection is performed, a game number reset setting screen in the third display hierarchy is displayed.

  In this way, the sub-display 310 serving as a display means can sequentially display a plurality of types of operation screens, and a predetermined update condition is established in which the player performs an operation of selecting an item and determining the selection. Thus, control is performed so as to be updated to another display screen. One of a plurality of display layers is set for each display screen, and each display screen is associated with an operation screen of a lower and / or upper display layer. Transition is possible.

  Such a display screen update is performed in the support menu process (step B1004). That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a screen update unit that can update the operation screen displayed on the display unit (sub-display unit 310) to another operation screen based on establishment of a predetermined update condition. A plurality of types of operation screens may be sequentially switched and displayed every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. In this case, the predetermined update condition is satisfied when the predetermined time elapses. It corresponds to.

[Support menu processing]
Next, support menu processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of support menu processing according to the embodiment of this invention.

  When the support menu process is started, the production control device 70 first determines whether or not there is a bet amount setting (step B5001). If there is a bet number setting (the result of step B5001 is “Y”), the support menu process is terminated. When there is a bet setting, it means that the player has bet, and in addition to a bet operation such as insertion of a medal by the player or operation of the max bet button 17, replay is set by establishment of a replay winning combination. This includes cases where The bet is also made during the game.

  On the other hand, when there is no bet number setting (the result of step B5001 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not there is an operation of the operation input unit (operation unit) (step B5002). The operation input unit includes the effect button 10 in addition to the operation input unit 30.

  When the operation input unit is operated (the result of step B5002 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 moves the sub display 310 to the lower end position of the liquid crystal display window 9d (near the operation input unit 30). Move (step B5003). Next, a menu selection (operation) screen (see FIG. 35B) is displayed on the sub-display 310 (step B5004). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an explanation display operation for selecting and determining the item “game description (reel arrangement, role composition)” from the menu selection screen (step B5005).

  Although the sub display 310 is moved prior to the display of the menu selection screen, the order thereof may be reversed. Further, the menu selection (operation) screen may be displayed on the sub-display 310 at the time when the waiting process (step B1003) is performed regardless of whether the operation input unit 30 is operated. In this case, after the menu selection screen is displayed, when the operation input unit 30 is operated, the sub-display 310 is moved to the lower end position of the liquid crystal display window 9d (near the operation input unit 30). Good. Further, the sub-display 310 may be moved to the lower end position of the liquid crystal display window 9d together with the display of the menu selection screen without requiring the operation of the operation input unit 30.

  When there is an explanation display operation (the result of step B5005 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 displays each screen for explaining the game contents such as the reel 6 arrangement screen and the winning combination screen, etc. An explanation display process that allows the player to select and display by the operation (step B5006) is executed, and the process proceeds to step B5018.

  When there is no explanation display operation (the result of step B5005 is “N”), the effect control device 70 selects a “game history display” item from the menu selection screen and performs a history display operation for determination. It is determined whether or not there is (step B5007).

  When there is a history display operation (the result of step B5007 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 displays each history screen such as a game history information screen for the past three days and a detailed history information screen for the day as an operation input unit. A history display process that allows the player to select and display by the operation of 30 is executed (step B5008), and the process proceeds to the process of step B5018. When a personal ID is registered by a mobile link process described later, it is possible to select and display a personal history information screen in the history display process.

  In addition, when there is no history display operation (the result of step B5007 is “N”), the effect control device 70 selects and determines the item “mobile interlocking (game log)” from the menu selection screen. It is determined whether or not there is an interlocking operation (step B5009).

  When there is a mobile-linked operation (the result of step B5009 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 registers a personal ID or displays content that only a player who has registered the personal ID can see. The portable interlocking process that enables this is executed (step B5010), and the process proceeds to step B5013.

  In addition, when there is no mobile link operation (the result of Step B5009 is “N”), the effect control device 70 has an effect customization operation for selecting and determining the “effect customization” item from the menu selection screen. Is determined (step B5011).

  When there is an effect customization operation (the result of step B5011 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 allows customization of various game effects (BGM, background image, game content, etc.). Is executed (step B5012), and the process proceeds to step B5018. Details of the effect customization process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when there is no production customization operation (the result of step B5011 is “N”), the production control device 70 selects and determines an “production mode switching” item from the menu selection screen. It is determined whether there is any (step B5013).

  When there is an effect mode switching operation (the result of step B5013 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 executes an effect mode switching process that enables switching to the effect mode selected by the player (step B5014). ), The process proceeds to step B5018. If there is no effect mode switching operation (the result of step B5013 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B5018.

  On the other hand, when there is no operation on the operation input unit (the result of step B5002 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not there is a simultaneous operation of all stop buttons (all reel stop buttons 24). (Step B5015). If there is no simultaneous operation of all the stop buttons (the result of step B5015 is “N”), the support menu process is terminated.

  In addition, when there is simultaneous operation of all stop buttons (the result of Step B5015 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets a forced reset flag (Step B5016) and executes a game number reset setting process (Step B5016). B5017). With these processes, a reset process is performed in which the number of times the game is executed is initialized and the specified number of times is selected from a plurality of values and reset. Details of the game number reset setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After completion of the game number reset setting process or when the execution of the process selected from the menu screen is completed, the effect control device 70 selects an “end” item from the menu selection screen to perform an end operation. It is determined whether or not there is (step B5018). If there is no end operation (the result of Step B5018 is “N”), the process returns to Step B5004.

  In addition, when there is an end operation (the result of Step B5018 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 displays a game effect screen relating to the game on the sub-display 310 (Step B5019). Further, it is determined whether or not the sub display 310 has moved (step B5020). If there has been movement (the result of step B5020 is “Y”), the position before the movement (for example, the liquid crystal display window 9d) It is moved (returned) to the center position) (step B5021). Thereafter, the support menu process is terminated.

  In addition, when there is simultaneous operation of all the stop buttons, the sub display 310 is not moved. However, even in this case, the sub display 310 may be moved. The reset process by simultaneous operation of all stop buttons is a forced reset, and is a reset process based on a reset operation that is a predetermined operation that can be executed by the player, not an operation of the RAM clear switch, as in a normal reset described later. However, the game states that can be executed are different.

  As described above, the effect control device 70 can perform the operation interlocking processing unit that can execute the operation interlocking process of changing the display content of the sub-display 310 in response to the operation of the operation input unit 30 in the support menu process. And a display moving means capable of moving the sub-display 310 to the first position and the second position closer to the operation input unit 30 than the first position (lower end position of the liquid crystal display window 9d), With the start of the operation interlocking process, the sub display 310 is moved from the first position to the second position. Further, when the sub display 310 is operated during the non-execution state of the auxiliary game (game), the operation interlocking process is started.

[History display processing]
Next, the history display process (step B5008) in the support menu process of FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a history display processing procedure according to the embodiment of this invention.

  When the history display process is started, the effect control device 70 first displays a history menu selection screen (game history screen) (step B5101). The history menu selection screen is a screen of the second display layer associated with the lower level of the support menu screen of the first display layer. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a history menu selection screen according to the embodiment of this invention. On the history menu selection screen, items for winning probability display, slump graph display, game number reset setting, setting reset release, and end are displayed, and items selected by the selection operation are displayed brighter than other items. So that the player can recognize it. When a decision input for determining an item is performed, a screen of the third display hierarchy associated with the item is displayed. If the end item is selected, the support menu screen is displayed again.

  In the case where there is a winning probability display operation for performing a decision input for determining in a state where the item of winning probability display is selected (step B5102), the effect control device 70 is in the AT state for a predetermined period (the current day, the past three days, etc.). Winning probability display processing for displaying various winning probability screens showing various winning probabilities such as the transition probability to ST350 and the winning probability of the pseudo bonus winning combination is executed (step B5103).

  In addition, when there is a slump display operation for performing a determination input for determining in a state where the item of the slump graph is selected (step B5104), the effect control device 70 displays a slump graph indicating a slump graph indicating increase / decrease of medals in a predetermined period. A slump graph display process for displaying the graph screen is executed (step B5105).

  In addition, when there is a G number reset setting operation for performing a decision input to determine the game number reset setting item in a selected state (step B5106), the effect control device 70 performs reset information for executing the reset process. A game number reset setting process for displaying a game number reset setting screen for performing the setting is executed (step B5107). Details of the game number reset setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when there is a setting reset canceling operation for performing a determination input for determining in a state where the setting reset canceling item is selected (step B5108), the effect control device 70 sets reset information for executing reset processing. A setting reset canceling process for displaying a game number reset canceling screen for canceling is executed (step B5109). Details of the setting reset cancellation processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when there is an end operation for performing a determination input for determining the end item in a selected state (the result of step B5110 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 ends the history display process. In this case, the support menu screen is displayed by executing the processing (step B5004) for displaying the menu selection (operation) screen in the support menu processing (see FIG. 29).

[Game number reset setting process]
Next, the game number reset setting process will be described. The game number reset setting process is common to the game number reset setting process (step B5107) in the history display process of FIG. 30 and the game number reset setting process (step B5005) in the support menu process shown in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a game number reset setting process according to the embodiment of this invention.

  When the game number reset setting process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether there is password protection (step B5201). The password protection can be set when the mobile terminal and the slot machine 1 are interlocked as will be described later, and is intended to prevent a reset process unintended by the player.

  When password protection is provided (the result of step B5201 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 displays a setting impossible (error) screen (step B5213) and determines whether or not there is a confirmation input. (Step B5214). On the non-setting screen, a password protection is made and a display indicating that the setting of the game number reset cannot be performed is made and a confirmation item is displayed. Then, when there is a confirmation input for performing a determination input in which the player selects a confirmation item (the result of step B5214 is “Y”), the game number reset setting process is terminated.

  When the game number reset process is completed, the game history screen is displayed by the process (step B5101) of displaying the history menu selection screen in the history display process (FIG. 30). Note that when password protection is performed, a password input screen may be displayed, and the processing after step B5202 may be performed based on the input of a valid password.

  On the other hand, when there is no password protection (the result of Step B5201 is “N”), the effect control device 70 sets determination information for normal reset (Step B5202), and determines whether there is a forced reset flag (Step B5203). ). The forced reset flag is a flag that is set when the reset process is selected by simultaneous operation of all stop buttons.

  When there is a forced reset flag (the result of step B5203 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 can set reset information for performing reset processing in the forced reset by simultaneous operation of all stop buttons. Is set for forced reset determination information and the forced reset flag is cleared (step B5204).

  The effect control device 70 resets after the forced reset flag is cleared (step B5204) or when there is no forced reset flag (the result of step B5203 is “N”), in the normal reset by selection in the sub-display 310. It is determined whether or not the current game progress state is a state in which a game number reset can be set with the normal reset determination information in which the game state capable of setting reset information for processing is defined (step B5205, step B5206). FIG. 33 shows a table for determining whether or not a game number reset can be set.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a game state in which reset information can be set by normal reset and forced reset according to the embodiment of this invention. The game state in which the reset process can be executed differs between the normal reset by selection on the sub-display 310 and the forced reset by simultaneous operation of all stop buttons. That is, the reset process includes a first reset process that is executed based on only the operation of the sub-display 310 that performs the first operation, and a second that is performed based on the operation of the all stop button that performs the second operation. There is a reset process, and each of the executable game states is different.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, in the case of a normal reset, reset information for executing the reset process only in the normal zone ST310 when the number of game executions counted from the reset process is 101 games or more. Setting is possible. In particular, by preventing the reset information from being set in the mission zone ST320 and the specific effect zone ST330, the inconvenience of the entertainment in the mission zone ST320 being hindered and the entertainment of the game being attenuated can be avoided. Is possible.

  On the other hand, in the case of a forced reset, in addition to the case where the number of executions of the game counted from the reset process is 101 games or more, the reset information is also displayed in the mission zone ST320 or the specific effect zone ST330. Setting is possible. Thereby, even if the production in the mission zone or the specific production is being executed for some reason, the reset processing can be set. That is, the second reset process (forced reset) can be reset in more game states than the first reset process (normal reset).

  When the number of executions of the game counted from the reset process is 100 games or less, or when the game is in the AT state ST350, the reset information cannot be set by either the normal reset or the forced reset. Thereby, it can suppress that reset processing is performed too frequently by the player.

  Also, in the heaven mode, the number of games is always canceled within 100 games, and the reset information cannot be set in 100 games or less until the reset process becomes possible. The possibility of reaching the specified number of times within the period can be given, and the inconvenience that the AT state ST350 (specific gaming state) does not occur by executing the reset process can be avoided. When password protection is performed, it can be said that the reset information setting is invalidated in all game states in both the normal reset and the forced reset.

  Here, the game state in which the reset information can be set is not limited to the setting shown in FIG. 33A, and may be set as shown in FIGS. 33B and 33C, for example. In the setting shown in FIG. 33 (B), in the case of a normal reset, if the continuous effect state ST331 is in the specific effect zone ST330, the reset information can be set. In the setting shown in FIG. 33C, the reset information in the case where the number of game executions counted from the reset process in the case of forced reset is less than 100 games is different from the setting shown in FIG. Setting is possible.

  Also, in all the examples shown in FIG. 33, in the case of the specific effect zone ST330, when the number of executions is a predetermined number before reaching the specified number of times, and the transition to the specific effect zone ST330 is performed, The setting is not allowed, and the reset information can be set when the number of executions is before a predetermined number before the predetermined number of times and the transition to the specific effect zone ST330 is based on winning the transition lottery. Good.

  Returning to FIG. 32, when the current game progress state is not a state in which the resetting of the number of games can be set (the result of step B5206 is “N”), the effect control device 70 executes the processes after step B5213. If the current game progress state is a state in which the game number reset can be set (the result of step B5206 is “Y”), a game number reset setting screen that forms a setting operation screen in which reset information can be set is displayed. It is displayed (step B5207).

  That is, the effect control device 70 forms a state determination unit that can determine whether or not the current game state is a game state in which the reset process can be performed, and resets based on the determination result of the state determination unit. A reset restricting means capable of restricting the execution of the reset process by the processing means (effect control device 70) is provided. Further, the effect control device 70 can determine whether or not the current game state is a game state in which the first reset process (normal reset) can be executed based on the first state determination value (see FIG. 33). And determining whether or not the current game state is a game state in which the second reset process (forced reset) can be performed based on the second state determination value (see FIG. 33). The second state determination means capable of

  Then, when there is a reset rejection input for making a decision input in a state where the reset rejection item is selected from the items on the game number reset setting screen (the result of step B5208 is “Y”) ]), The game number reset setting process is terminated. If there is no reset rejection input (the result of step B5208 is “N”), it is determined whether there is a reset approval input for performing a determination input in a state where the reset approval item is selected (step S5208). B5209). If there is no reset approval input (the result of step B5209 is “N”), the process returns to the determination of whether there is a reset rejection input (step B5208).

  In addition, when there is a reset approval input (the result of step B5208 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets a game number reset flag as reset information for executing the reset process (step B5210). Further, the game number reset setting display for notifying that the reset information is set is set to ON (step B5211), and a game number reset confirmation screen is displayed (step B5212). By setting the game number reset setting display to ON, it is possible to notify that the player is in a standby state in which reset information is set and the reset process is performed by operating the start lever 21. Thereby, the game start operation can be performed in a state where it is recognized that it is in the standby state of the reset process, and the interest regarding the reset process is improved.

  After that, the effect control device 70 resets the number of games when there is a confirmation input for performing a decision input for determining the confirmation item on the game number reset confirmation screen (the result of step B5214 is “Y”). The setting process ends. That is, reset information that enables the effect control device 70 to set reset information (game number reset flag) for executing the reset process based on a predetermined setting operation being performed while the game is not being executed. Make setting means. Further, the effect control device 70 serves as a standby state notifying unit capable of notifying that the reset information is set in the standby state in which the reset information is set. In addition, the effect control device 70 serves as reset information setting means capable of setting reset information based on a predetermined setting operation being performed during display of a predetermined setting operation screen.

  Note that the information set here is reset information for executing the reset process, and the reset process is not yet started in the state where the reset information is set, and the start lever 21 is operated after this. Based on this, reset processing is performed. By doing so, the reset process is executed in relation to the execution of the game, and the reset process can be used to improve the game performance.

  For this reason, when the start lever 21 is operated by the game number reset setting display, the player is shown that the reset process is performed. In this case, in order to prevent the game number reset setting display from being lost, it is desirable not to shift to the customer waiting state or to display the demo image or the energy saving image on the sub display 310.

  As described above, the game performance can be improved by providing a new function in which the relationship between the number of executions and the specified number of times is reset (updated) by a reset process based on the player's operation. In addition, there is a possibility that the specified number of games can be reached with a smaller number of games than before the reset process, so if the player detects that the number of times the game has been executed will take a long time to reach the specified number of games, It is possible to prevent the user from quitting and avoiding playing games, and the operation can be improved. In addition, since the execution of the reset process is restricted depending on the game state, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the game performance is impaired by the reset process.

  In addition, since the setting operation screen that can instruct the setting of reset information is set to be displayed when a predetermined update condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the reset information may be set against the player's intention. Can be suppressed. That is, since it becomes difficult to reach the setting operation screen, it is possible to prevent the reset information from being accidentally set by another player or a staff member.

  From the above, the number of executions of the game accompanied by the variable display of the plurality of reels 6 is counted, and a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is generated based on the fact that the number of executions has reached a predetermined number of times set in advance. The slot machine 1 can be controlled in such a manner that a display means (sub-display 310) capable of sequentially displaying a plurality of types of operation screens and a display means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition The screen updating means (production control device 70) capable of updating the displayed operation screen to another operation screen, and the predetermined setting operation being performed while the predetermined setting operation screen is being displayed. Based on the reset information setting means (production control device 70) capable of setting the reset information and the reset information being set, the reset information resetting the relationship between the number of executions and the specified number of times. Reset operation means (production control device 70) capable of executing the image processing, and the setting operation screen is set to be displayed on the display means when a predetermined update condition is satisfied a plurality of times. Will be.

  Here, based on the fact that the number of executions has reached a predetermined number of times set in advance, the generation of a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player means that the specific gaming state is generated only by reaching the predetermined number of times. And generating a specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the prescribed number of times has been reached. In addition, establishment of the predetermined update condition means that there is a predetermined operation or a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, resetting the relationship between the number of executions and the specified number of times means updating (determining and setting) the remaining number of games until the number of times the game has been executed reaches the specified number of times. May be updated to a smaller value (initialization, increase, decrease, no change), or the specified number of times may be updated to a value larger than the number of game executions (initialization, increase, decrease, no change). However, both the number of executions and the specified number of times may be updated. In addition, when updating the number of executions or the specified number of times, it is possible to select (determine) some predetermined values in order or randomly by random selection (determination), or randomly select any value by lottery It may be (determined).

  The plural types of operation screens are each set with one of a plurality of display layers, and are associated with operation screens of lower and / or upper display layers, and screen update means (effect control device 70). ) Is configured to update the operation screen displayed on the display means (sub-display unit 310) to an operation screen of another display hierarchy associated with the operation screen based on a predetermined update operation being performed. In the setting operation screen, a display hierarchy that can be displayed on the display unit based on a plurality of update operations is set.

[Setting reset release processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure of setting reset cancellation processing (step B5109) of history display processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the setting reset cancellation process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether there is a game number reset flag that is set when reset information is set in the game number reset setting process (see FIG. 32). Is determined (step B5301).

  When there is no game number reset flag (the result of step B5301 is “N”), the effect control device 70 displays a non-cancelable (error) screen (step B5308) and determines whether there is a confirmation input (step B5303). B5309). On the non-cancelable screen, a display indicating that the reset information has not been set and cancellation cannot be performed is displayed, and a confirmation item is displayed.

  Then, when there is a confirmation input for performing a decision input that is determined with the player selecting a confirmation item (the result of step B5309 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 ends the setting reset cancellation process. To do. When the setting reset cancellation process is completed, the game history screen is displayed by the process (step B5101) of displaying the history menu selection screen in the history display process (see FIG. 30).

  On the other hand, when there is a game number reset flag (the result of step B5301 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 displays a game number reset release screen that forms a predetermined release operation screen (step B5302).

  Then, when there is a reset release rejection input for performing a determination input in a state where the reset release rejection item is selected from the items on the game number reset release screen, the effect control device 70 (the result of step B5303 is “Y”), the setting reset release processing is terminated.

  In addition, when there is no reset release rejection input (the result of step B5303 is “N”), the production control device 70 receives a reset release approval input for performing a decision input in a state where the reset release approval item is selected. It is determined whether it exists (step B5304). If there is no reset release approval input (the result of step B5304 is “N”), the process returns to the determination of whether there is a reset release rejection input (step B5303).

  In addition, when there is a reset release approval input (the result of step B5304 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 clears the game number reset flag (step B5305), and reset information is set. The game number reset setting display for informing this is set to OFF (step B5306), and a reset release confirmation screen is displayed (step B5307). Thereafter, when there is a confirmation input for performing a decision input to determine the confirmation item on the reset cancellation confirmation screen (the result of step B5309 is “Y”), the setting reset cancellation process is terminated.

  As a result, the reset information setting is canceled, and the reset process is not performed even if the start lever 21 is operated thereafter. For example, when the reset information is set against the player's intention. For example, the reset process is not executed unintentionally. In other words, the effect control device 70 serves as a reset information releasing unit that can release the setting of the reset information based on a predetermined release operation being performed while the game is not being executed.

  Next, a display example on the sub display 310 when setting the reset information for executing the reset process will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the sub-display unit 310 when setting the reset information for executing the reset process according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (A), in a state where a game is being played in the normal zone ST310, a normal screen indicating that it is a normal zone is displayed, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the mission zone ST320 is suggested. The effect image 310a is displayed. In addition, a game number display 310b indicating the number of times the game has been executed since the reset process, a mobile interlocking display 310c indicating whether the mobile terminal and the slot machine 1 are interlocking with each other, and reset information are set. A game number reset setting display 310d for informing whether or not the game is being played is displayed. Here, it is displayed that 200 games have been executed as the game number display 310b, that the mobile link display 310c indicates that the game is being linked, and the game number reset setting display 310d indicates that no reset information is set (OFF). It is shown.

  If there is an operation input for operating the effect button 10 or the operation input unit 30 when the bet state is not set, a support menu screen of the first display hierarchy is displayed as shown in FIG. In this support menu screen, first, the item of the game description is selected, and the selection input for moving the item to be selected by operating the operation input unit 30 is performed, as shown in FIG. The game history item is selected.

  In this state, when the operation input unit 30 is operated and a determination input for determining selection of an item is performed, a game history screen of the second display hierarchy is displayed as shown in FIG. In this game history screen, first, the item of winning probability display is selected, and by the selection input for moving the item to be selected by operating the operation input unit 30, as shown in FIG. When the determination input for determining the selection of the item is performed by operating the operation input unit 30 as shown in FIG. 35F, the game number reset setting screen (setting operation) of the third display hierarchy is performed. Screen) is displayed. By making the setting operation screen displayed based on a plurality of update operations in this way, it becomes difficult to reach the setting operation screen, and reset information is set accidentally by other players and staff. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, since it is the normal zone ST310 and the number of executions of the game counted from the reset process is 101 games or more, the game number reset setting screen is displayed, but the reset process is accepted. If the game state is not possible, a setting impossible screen is displayed as described later (see FIG. 36). In the game history screen, the game number reset setting item may be selectable only in a game state where a game number reset can be accepted.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (F), when the display hierarchy is shifted to the game number reset setting screen, an explanation display for explaining the operation method of the operation input unit 30 displayed on the right side of the display screen of the sub-display 310 is displayed. Erased. By shifting to this display hierarchy by selection input and decision input, the operation method is well known, there is no problem even if the explanation display is not displayed, and further, matters to be notified can be displayed on the entire display screen, so it is important. You can make things easier to see.

  On the game number reset setting screen, the number of game executions up to now (here, 200 games) is notified and it is confirmed that this is reset. It is to be noted that the next game number zone (for example, the game number zone indicated as a chance or a big chance in FIG. 14) with a high expected value to be released, or the number of games up to the game number zone is notified. Thus, the player may be asked to perform the reset process.

  In addition, when the game number reset setting screen is displayed, first, the “no” item, which is a reset rejection item for selecting not to set the game number reset, is selected, and the player's Unintended reset information setting is prevented. When selection input for moving the item by operating the operation input unit 30 is performed, as shown in FIG. 35 (G), “Yes”, which is a reset approval item for selecting the setting for resetting the number of games. The item is selected, and further, when the determination input (reset approval input) for determining selection of the item is performed by operating the operation input unit 30, the reset information is set. Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (H), a game number reset confirmation screen in the fourth display hierarchy is displayed. If there is a betting operation with the “Yes” item selected, the reset information may be set assuming that “Yes” decision input (reset approval input) has been received, It may be considered that there has been a “NO” decision input (reset rejection input).

  The game number reset confirmation screen displays that the reset information has been set, and displays that the reset process is performed by an operation on the start lever 21 of the next game. It is also displayed that the reset information can be canceled until the start lever 21 of the next game is operated. It is to be noted that the next game number zone (for example, the game number zone indicated as a chance or a big chance in FIG. 14) with a high expected value to be released, or the number of games up to the game number zone is notified. May be.

  In this game number reset confirmation screen, the item “OK” is selected, and when the determination input (confirmation input) for determining the selection of the item is performed by operating the operation input unit 30, as shown in FIG. It returns to the display during the game. Since the reset information is set, the game number reset setting display 310d for notifying whether the reset information is set indicates that the reset information is set (ON). Also, if a betting operation is performed while the game number reset confirmation screen is displayed, it is considered that there has been a decision input (confirmation input), and the display returns to the display during the game as shown in FIG. You may do it.

  In the state where the reset information is set (ON) is displayed in the game number reset setting display 310d, even if the game is not executed for a predetermined period and the customer wait state is entered, the customer wait demo In the image, a game number reset setting display 310d is displayed to indicate that reset information is set (ON). Thereby, it is possible to perform a game start operation in a state in which it is recognized that it is in the reset standby state, and the interest regarding the reset processing is improved. Further, it is possible to prevent a reset process unintended by the player.

  Further, the game number display 310b and the game number reset setting display 310d may be displayed on the main display 3, or may be displayed by a dedicated notification device so that the player can easily understand. Further, a support menu screen and other screens may be displayed on the main display 3, and only the game number reset setting screen and the reset confirmation screen that are particularly important for the player are displayed on the main display 3 The image may be displayed.

  Next, a case where reset information is set in a game state where reset information cannot be set by normal reset will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example on the sub-display 310 when reset information is set in a game state where reset information cannot be set by normal reset according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, it is in the continuous effect state ST331 of the specific effect zone ST330, and the continuous effect screen is displayed on the sub-display 310 as shown in FIG. Note that a game number display 310b indicating the number of times the game has been executed since the reset process, a portable interlocking display 310c indicating whether the portable terminal and the slot machine 1 are interlocked with each other, and reset information are set. A game number reset setting display 310d for informing whether or not the game is present is also displayed.

  When the bet state is not set, the operation input for operating the effect button 10 and the operation input unit 30 is performed, and the operations shown in FIGS. 35 (B) to (D) are performed, and the game history screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 36 (B). When the game number reset setting item is selected and a determination input is made, a setting impossible (error) screen is displayed as shown in FIG. In this setting impossible screen, it is displayed that reset information cannot be set in the current game state. In addition, the item of “OK” is selected on the setting impossible screen, and when the determination input (confirmation input) for determining the selection of the item by operating the operation input unit 30 is performed, the screen shown in FIG. Return to the display during the game.

  In the game history screen, if the game number reset setting item can be selected only in a game state in which the game number reset can be accepted, and the reset information setting cannot be accepted as in this example, FIG. 36 (B) You may make it impossible to select the game number reset setting item on the game history screen. In the case of a forced reset performed by simultaneously operating all the stop buttons (reel stop buttons 24), the game number reset setting screen shown in FIG. 35 (F) or FIG. 36 (C) accompanying the simultaneous operation of all the stop buttons. The setting impossible screen is displayed. Note that the support menu screen may not be displayed even if there is an operation input in the mission zone or the specific production zone, and even if this is done, it is possible to restrict the reset information from being set. It becomes.

  Next, a case where the reset information setting is canceled will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a display example on the sub-display unit 310 when canceling the reset information setting according to the embodiment of this invention.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, when an entry for canceling the acceptance reset is selected on the game history screen and a decision input for determining the selection of the item is made, the third display hierarchy is displayed as shown in FIG. A game number reset release screen (release operation screen) is displayed.

  When the display hierarchy shifts to the game number reset release screen, the explanation display for explaining the operation method of the operation input unit 30 displayed on the right side of the display screen of the sub-display 310 is deleted. On the game number reset cancellation screen, a display asking whether or not to reset the reset information is displayed, and an item for selecting whether or not to reset the reset information is displayed. When the game number reset setting screen is displayed, first, the “No” reset selection item for selecting not to cancel the reset information setting is selected, and the player's intention The release of the reset information setting is prevented.

  When selection input for moving the item by operating the operation input unit 30 is performed, as shown in FIG. 37C, “Yes”, which is an item of reset release approval for selecting to cancel the setting of reset information. When the determination input (reset release approval input) for determining the selection of the item by operating the operation input unit 30 is performed, the reset information setting is released. Then, as shown in FIG. 37D, a game number reset release confirmation screen in the fourth display hierarchy is displayed.

  The game number reset cancellation confirmation screen displays that the reset information setting has been cancelled. In addition, it is displayed that the reset information setting can be protected by the password setting by performing the mobile link. In this game number reset release confirmation screen, the item “OK” is selected, and when a decision input (confirmation input) is performed to determine the selection of the item by operating the operation input unit 30, the display returns to the display during the game. Since the reset information setting has been canceled, the game number reset setting display 310d for informing whether or not the reset information has been set indicates that the reset information is not set (OFF).

  Next, a description will be given of a password protection function that can prevent the reset information unintended by the player from being set by the mobile link that links the mobile terminal and the slot machine 1. As described above, the reset information can be set by a normal reset by the operation of the operation input unit 30 or a forced reset by the operation of the all stop button. However, when the player is away from the seat, other people set the reset information. If the start lever 21 is operated without noticing this, the reset process may be performed. In order to prevent this, the game number reset setting display 310d informs that the reset information has been set, but in order to prevent unintended reset processing more reliably, password protection is provided. Password protection that prevents others from setting reset information is possible.

[Mobile interlocking processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of portable interlocking processing (step B5013) of the support menu processing (FIG. 29) according to the embodiment of this invention.

  When the mobile link process is started, the production control device 70 first displays a link menu selection screen (see FIG. 39) (step B5401). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a link start operation for selecting and determining the item “mobile link (game log) start” from the link menu selection screen (step B5402).

  When there is a link start operation (the result of step B5402 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 executes a link start process that is executed when the mobile link is performed for the first time or when the mobile link is restarted (step B5403). The processing shifts to step B5410. On the other hand, when there is no interlock start operation (the result of step B5402 is “N”), there is a personal log confirmation operation for selecting and determining the “personal log (history) confirmation” item from the interlocking menu selection screen. Is determined (step B5404).

  When there is a personal log confirmation operation (the result of step B5404 is “Y”), the performance control device 70 executes a personal log display process for displaying information such as missions achieved and points acquired during mobile link. (Step B5405), the process proceeds to Step B5410. If there is no personal log confirmation operation (the result of step B5404 is “N”), an interlock end operation for selecting and determining an item “end mobile link (game log)” from the link menu selection screen is performed. It is determined whether or not there is (step B5406).

  When there is a link end operation (the result of step B5406 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 issues a link end process for issuing a restart password necessary for restarting the mobile link and ending the mobile link. (Step B5407), the process proceeds to Step B5410. If there is no linked end operation (the result of step B5406 is “N”), is there a game number reset protection operation that is determined by selecting the “G number reset protection” item from the linked menu selection screen? It is determined whether or not (step B5408).

  When there is a game number reset protection operation (the result of step B5408 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 executes a G number (game number) reset protection process (step B5409). Details of the G number (game number) reset protection process will be described with reference to FIG.

  With the mobile linkage process, it is possible to set execution of a predetermined linked game by linking with an external server via a communication terminal possessed by the player. That is, the production control device 70 forms a linked game means that enables execution of a predetermined linked game by linking with an external server via a communication terminal possessed by the player.

  When there is no game number reset protection operation (the result of step B5408 is “N”), or when the processing of step B5403, step B5405, step B5407, and step B5409 is completed, the effect control device 70 selects the interlocking menu. It is determined whether or not there is an ending operation for selecting and determining the item “END” from the screen (step B5410).

  When there is no end operation (the result of step B5410 is “N”), the effect control device 70 returns to the process of step B5401. If there is an end operation (the result of step B5410 is “Y”), the mobile link process ends.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an interlocking menu selection screen displayed on the sub-display unit 310 according to the embodiment of this invention. As shown in FIG. 39, a link menu selection screen is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display 310, and “mobile link (game log) start”, “personal log (history) confirmation”, “mobile link (game log)” is displayed. Any one of “End”, “G Number Reset Protection”, and “End” is selected and determined. For example, during the challenge of an unachieved mission, restrict the item of “End of mobile link (game log)” from being selected and decided ("Are you sure you are challenging an unachieved mission? Are you sure?" Display). Further, even if the above-described regulation is performed, the regulation can be released if the game is not performed for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 40 shows the slot machine 1 (game machine) and the external server G when the slot machine 1 (game machine) according to the embodiment of the present invention receives the interlock start process (step B5403) and the interlock end process (step B5407). It is a flowchart which shows an example of this operation | movement.

  When the slot machine 1 (game machine) accepts the interlock start process, a selection screen for allowing the player to select and decide whether to perform the mobile interlock for the first time or to resume is displayed on the sub-display 310. ing. And when selection decision to perform mobile link for the first time is made, it is accepted as a link start operation. On the other hand, when the selection decision for resuming the mobile link is made, it is accepted as a link resumption operation.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, when the interlock start operation is accepted by the slot machine 1 (game machine), the slot machine 1 uses an access code (for example, a two-dimensional barcode) to the external server G. Is displayed on the sub-display 310 (step Y1). When this access code is read by the mobile terminal M and the external server G is accessed from the web, the external server G transmits necessary input request screen information to the mobile terminal M (step G1). When the essential items displayed on the input request screen are input on the portable terminal M, the external server G accepts the necessary items (step G2), creates a personal log record (step G3), and the start password. Is issued (step G4).

  The slot machine 1 displays an access code for the external server G on the sub-display 310, and then accepts a password input operation (step Y2). When the player inputs the start password to the slot machine 1 based on the start password transmitted from the external server G to the portable terminal M, the slot machine 1 accepts the start password (step Y3) The mobile link is started (step Y4), and the personal history (log) is updated (step Y5).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (B), when the interlock end operation is accepted by the slot machine 1 (game machine), the slot machine 1 responds to the history of games that have been played in the state of being interlocked with each other. The access code is displayed on the sub display 310 (step Y11). When this access code is read by the portable terminal M and the external server G is accessed from the web, the external server G updates the personal log (history) record (step G11) and issues a resume password (step G12).

  As shown in FIG. 40C, when the interlock resumption operation is accepted by the slot machine 1 (game machine), the slot machine 1 accepts the password input operation (step Y21). When the player inputs the restart password to the slot machine 1 based on the restart password transmitted from the external server G to the mobile terminal M, the slot machine 1 accepts the input of the restart password (step Y22), the mobile phone linkage is started (step Y23), and the personal history (log) is updated (step Y24).

[G number reset protection processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the G number reset protection process (step B5409) in the portable link process (FIG. 38) according to the embodiment of this invention. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed in the G number reset protection processing according to the embodiment of this invention.

  When the G number reset protection process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the mobile device is interlocked (step B5501). If the mobile device is not interlocked with the mobile device (the result of step B5501 is “N”). ]) And an error notification process is executed (step B5502).

  In the error notification process, an error screen for notifying that password protection cannot be performed because mobile phone linkage is not performed is displayed (see FIG. 42A). In addition, the item “OK” is selected on the error screen, and when the confirmation input for determining the selection of the item is performed by operating the operation input unit 30, the error notification process is ended and the G number reset protection process is ended. To do. In this case, the process proceeds to a process (step B5401) for displaying an interlocking menu selection screen in the portable interlocking process (see FIG. 41).

  On the other hand, the effect control device 70 displays a setting menu selection screen (step B5503) when the mobile link is in progress (the result of step B5501 is "Y"). As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the setting menu selection screen allows selection of items for protection password setting, protection password release, and termination. After the setting menu selection screen is displayed, if there is a protection path setting operation for performing a decision input to determine with the protection password setting item selected (the result of step B5504 is “Y”), the protection password setting process Is executed (step B5505).

  In the protection password setting process, a protection password setting screen as shown in FIG. 42C is displayed. When the player inputs a 4-digit number and selects an OK item, a process for starting password protection using the 4-digit number as a password is performed. As a result, password protection is enabled, and reset information cannot be set unless password protection is canceled by inputting the password. That is, the reset protection that enables the production control device 70 to protect the reset information from being set by the reset information setting unit (production control device 70) during the execution of the cooperation game by the cooperation game means (production control device 70). Make a means.

  Further, processing for displaying a setting completion screen for displaying the set password as shown in FIG. In the setting completion screen, the item “OK” is selected, and when the confirmation input for determining the selection of the item is performed by operating the operation input unit 30, the protection password setting process is ended and the setting menu selection screen is displayed. Return to processing. The password is not set by the player, but the gaming machine may set an arbitrary character string as the password and display it on the setting completion screen.

  In addition, when there is a protection pass canceling operation for performing a decision input for determining in a state where the protection password canceling item is selected on the setting menu selection screen (result of Step B5506 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 A protection password release process is executed (step B5507).

  In the protection password canceling process, a process for accepting the input of a password set in the same display as in FIG. 42C is performed, and when a suitable password is input, a process for canceling the password protection is performed. Thereby, the reset information can be set. After performing these processes, the protection password release process is terminated, and the process returns to the process of displaying the setting menu selection screen. Note that the password protection is released not only by the protection password releasing process but also by termination of the mobile link.

  Such password protection makes it possible to regulate the reset process during the execution of the linked game, so that it is possible to prevent the unintentional reset process from being performed when the user leaves the seat. Further, it is possible to promote the execution of the linked game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since a password can be set, it is possible to reliably prevent an unintentional reset process from being performed.

  Although password protection cannot be performed unless the mobile link is in progress, the mobile link may be temporarily started so that password protection can be used even if mobile link registration is not performed. In this case, for example, an interlocking temporary start item is provided on the game history screen, and an interlocking temporary start screen in which the mobile interlocking temporary start can be set based on selection and determination input of this item is displayed. Then, based on the completion of the necessary setting operation, the mobile link is temporarily started so that password protection can be used. Moreover, when carrying out mobile interlocking, any of a plurality of characters can be set as a breeding character, and the breeding character may be displayed on the sub-display 310, or an operation on each display screen by the breeding character. Guidance notification may be performed.

[Production customization processing]
Next, the rendering customization process (step B5015) in the support menu process of FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect customization process according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the effect customization process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the mobile phone is interlocked (step B5601). If the mobile phone is not interlocked (the result of step B5601 is “N”). Then, error notification processing is executed (step B5602).

  In the error notification process, an error screen for notifying that the customized content cannot be held because the mobile phone is not linked is displayed. At this time, when it is not necessary to hold, the process of step B5603 may be executed. When the effect customization is not performed, the error notification process ends, and the effect customization process ends. In this case, the process may be shifted to a process (step B5401) for displaying an interlocking menu selection screen in the mobile interlocking process to prompt the start of mobile interlocking, or a support menu screen may be displayed.

  The effect control device 70 displays a customization menu selection screen (step B5603) when the mobile phone is interlocked (the result of step B5601 is “Y”). The customization menu selection screen is a screen of the second display layer associated with the lower level of the support menu screen of the first display layer.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a customization menu selection screen according to the embodiment of this invention. On the customize menu selection screen, items for background setting, operation cut-in effect setting, promotion effect setting, and end are displayed. As with other screens, the item selected by the selection operation is more than the other items. It is displayed brightly so that the player can recognize it. When a decision input for determining an item is performed, a screen of the third display hierarchy associated with the item is displayed. If the end item is selected, the support menu screen is displayed again. In addition, settings related to the regular effects may be executed from the customization menu selection screen.

  In the case where there is a background setting operation for performing a determination input in which the background setting item is selected (the result of step B5604 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 performs the effect, the menu screen display, or the like. Background setting processing for performing background setting is executed (step B5605).

  In addition, when there is a cut-in setting operation for performing a determination input in which the operation cut-in effect setting item is selected (the result of step B5606 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 performs the player's determination. An operation cut-in effect setting process for setting the mode of the operation cut-in effect executed by the operation is executed (step B5607).

  Further, in the case where there is a promotion effect setting operation for performing a decision input to determine in a state where the item of promotion effect setting is selected (result of step B5608 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 is in the promotion lottery state ST360. Then, a pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process for setting an aspect of the promotion effect including notification of the transitional pseudo bonus state (ST361 to ST363) is executed (step B5609). Details of the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when there is an end operation for performing a decision input to determine the end item being selected (result of Step B5610 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 ends the effect customization process. In this case, the support menu screen is displayed by executing the processing (step B5004) for displaying the menu selection (operation) screen in the support menu processing (see FIG. 29).

[Pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process]
Next, the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process (step B5608) in the effect customization process of FIG. 43 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect customization processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process is started, the effect control device 70 first displays a promotion effect setting screen (step B5701). The promotion effect setting screen is a screen of the third display layer associated with the lower level of the customization menu selection screen of the second display layer. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the promotion effect setting screen according to the embodiment of the present invention. On the promotion effect setting screen, items of validity / invalidity setting of promotion effect, notification level setting of promotion effect, and end are displayed. If the end item is selected, the screen returns to the customize menu selection screen.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when setting the promotion effect to be valid / invalid, either “valid” or “invalid” is selected. When there is an invalid operation for operating the promotion effect to “invalid” (the result of step B5702 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets the execution of the promotion effect to invalid (step B5703). On the other hand, when there is an effective operation for operating the promotion effect to “valid” (the result of step B5704 is “Y”), the execution of the promotion effect is set to be effective (step B5705).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, when setting the notification level of the promotion effect, either “normal”, “clear”, or “ambiguous” can be selected. When “clear” is set, the contents of the effect in the promotion mode and whether or not the promotion has been made are clearly notified. When “normal” is set, the effect in the promotion mode is ambiguous, but whether or not the promotion has been promoted is clearly notified. When “ambiguous” is set, the contents of the performance in the promotion mode and whether or not the promotion has been made are also reported in an ambiguous manner. A specific production mode will be described later. The default settings are “valid” and “normal”.

  When there is a clear notification operation for operating the notification level of the promotion effect “clearly” (the result of step B5706 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 clearly sets the notification level (notification mode) of the promotion effect. Setting is made (step B5707). If there is a normal notification operation for operating the notification level of the promotion effect to “normal” (the result of step B5708 is “Y”), the notification level (notification mode) of the promotion effect is normally set (step) B5709). Further, when there is an ambiguous notification operation for operating the notification level of the promotion effect to “ambiguous” (the result of step B5710 is “Y”), the notification level (notification mode) of the promotion effect is clearly set (step) B5711).

  In addition, when there is an end operation for performing a determination input to determine the end item in a selected state (the result of step B5712 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 ends the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process. . In this case, the customization menu selection screen is displayed by executing the processing (step B5602) for displaying the menu selection (operation) screen in the effect customization processing (see FIG. 43).

  As described above, by making it possible to set whether or not to perform the promotion notification effect, it is possible to enjoy the process of whether or not the expectation level of the pseudo bonus is changed, or whether or not the expectation level of the pseudo bonus is changed. It becomes possible for the player to select whether to look forward to the end, and the game performance can be improved significantly. In this way, the effect control device 70 serves as a function switching unit that provides a function of switching the execution mode of the promotion notification effect.

[Game management information setting process]
Next, the game management information setting process (step B1006) in the effect control process of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of game management information setting processing according to the embodiment of this invention.

  When the game management information setting process is started, the effect control device 70 changes the setting with the setting device 60 (the result of step B1501 is “Y”) or there is a game number reset flag (the result of step B1502). Is “Y”), the reset processing after step B1503 is executed.

  In addition, when the setting is changed by the setting device 60, the setting device 60 is operated to set a setting value different from that before the operation, and the setting device 60 is operated to set the same setting value as before the operation. Including cases.

  The game number reset flag is set in the above-described game number reset setting process (FIG. 32). The game number reset flag is also set when the game is started after the power is turned on with the RAM clear based on the operation of the RAM clear switch.

  When performing the reset process, the effect control device 70 first clears the number of executed games and the game number reset flag (step B1503), and sets the counted number of executions to zero. Then, in the initial internal mode setting process (step B1504), the internal mode to be set is selected at a rate corresponding to the set value set by the setting device 60.

  Here, the selection ratio of the internal mode for each set value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of an initial mode determination table (at the time of reset) that defines the selection ratio of the internal mode for each set value according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  For example, in the case of setting 1, the normal A mode is selected with a probability of 70%, the normal B mode is selected with a rate of 20%, and the heaven mode is selected with a rate of 10%. Further, here, as the set value becomes more advantageous for the player, the selection ratio of the normal A mode is decreased, and the selection ratio of the normal B mode and the heaven mode is increased. This makes it easier to select an internal mode that is more advantageous to the player as the set value is more advantageous to the player (there is a high possibility that the timing of releasing the number of games is earlier). In addition, by changing the selection ratio of the internal mode depending on the setting value, the internal mode set after the reset process is estimated by, for example, estimating the number of games that have been released from the game number and the transition probability to the mission zone. It is possible to have a game of guessing.

  Returning to FIG. 47, after the first internal mode setting process (step B1504), the effect control device 70 releases the game number from a plurality of game number zones divided by the number of game executions based on the set internal mode. A release zone determination process for determining a release zone to be executed is executed (step B1505).

  Next, the effect control device 70 executes a cancellation game number setting process for determining and setting a detailed cancellation game (specified number of times) from the determined cancellation zone (step B1506). Note that the specified number of times may be directly determined (selected) without determining (selecting) the release zone. The release game (specified number of times) may be determined in such a way that all values up to the ceiling (maximum number of games) of each internal mode may be determined, or set in advance. You may determine by the method of selecting from several choices.

  Thereafter, the effect control device 70 executes effect mode setting processing for selecting and setting the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the mission zone from among low accuracy, high accuracy, and ultra high accuracy (step B1507). Then, the game is executed on an external device having a function of counting and displaying the number of executed games (for example, a data display device that collects signals from game machines such as a call lamp and displays various game data). The reset specific signal output setting process for setting the output of the reset specific signal for notifying that the number of times has been reset is executed (step B1508), and the game management information setting process is ended.

  By outputting the reset specific signal to the external device, it is possible to notify the external device that the number of game executions should be reset by executing the reset process. As a result, the number of times the game is managed matches the number of times, and accurate information can be provided to the player.

  Through the above processing, the prescribed number of times that the counted number of game executions is initialized and the number of games is released is selected from a plurality of values and reset. In other words, the production control device 70 forms a reset processing unit capable of executing a reset process for resetting the relationship between the number of executions and the specified number of times based on a predetermined operation that can be executed by the player, and reset information ( Based on the fact that the game start operation has been performed in the setting state of the (game number reset flag), a reset execution means capable of executing a reset process is provided. Further, the effect control device 70 collects various signals output from the slot machine 1 and counts and displays the number of times the game has been executed. 70), a reset specific signal output means capable of outputting a reset specific signal capable of specifying that the reset process has been executed.

  The reset specific signal does not output a dedicated reset specific signal, but is output over a special game state (bonus) occurrence period or a special game state (AT state) generation period. Alternatively, the AT signal output may be output instead. In that case, the external device can be distinguished by outputting the signal over a shorter time (a preset fixed value, for example, 256 ms) than a normal special prize signal or AT signal.

  In an external device (a data display device that collects signals from gaming machines such as call lamps and displays various game data), the display of the number of special prizes, the number of ATs, etc. is not increased when a reset specific signal is received. It is better to reset (clear 0) only the number of games (number of rotations). In addition, when the reset specific signal is substituted with a special award signal or AT signal, it is determined whether or not the corresponding signal is longer than a predetermined period (time) by using a threshold value and longer than the predetermined period. Adds the number of special prizes and the number of ATs, resets the number of games at the timing when the output of the corresponding signal is completed, and if the number of games is shorter than the predetermined period, the number of games is reset and the number of special prizes and the number of ATs are added. Without resetting, the number of games may be reset (it may be the determined timing or the timing when the output of the corresponding signal is ended). The reset specific signal output setting process may or may not be performed.

[Game management information setting process]
Next, the game management information setting process (step B1018) in the effect control process of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game management information setting processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the game management information update process is started, the effect control device 70, when the special gaming state ST220 is finished (the result of step B1601 is “Y”) or a specific gaming state (AT state ST350, promoted lottery state ST360 and pseudo When the bonus states ST361, ST362, and ST363 are completed (the result of step B1602 is “Y”), the reset process after step B1603 is executed.

  When performing the reset process, the effect control device 70 first clears the number of executed games to 0 (step B1603) and executes a transition destination internal mode setting process (step B1604). In the transfer destination internal mode setting process (step B1604), a process of selecting an internal mode to be set at a ratio according to the set value set by the setting device 60 and the internal mode set so far is executed.

  Here, a process for selecting the reset process internal mode will be described. FIG. 50 shows a specific game in the mode transition determination table that defines the ratio between the internal mode set before the reset process and the internal mode set after the reset process according to the set value according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the mode transfer determination table used when a state is complete | finished. Note that “do not shift” means that the set internal mode is set again.

  For example, when the internal mode set before the reset process is the normal A mode, the next internal mode is selected at the rate shown in FIG. If not, the normal A mode is selected with a probability of 40%, the normal B mode is selected with a rate of 56%, and the heaven mode is selected with a rate of 4%. Further, when the set internal mode is the normal B mode, the next internal mode is selected at the rate shown in FIG. 50B, and when it is set 1, no transition is made. That is, the normal B mode is selected with a probability of 90%, and the heaven mode is selected with a rate of 10%.

  When the set internal mode is the heaven mode, the next internal mode is selected at the rate shown in FIG. 50C. When the internal mode is set 1, the normal A mode is selected. Is selected with a probability of 60%, the normal B mode is selected at a rate of 10%, and no transition is made, that is, the heaven mode is selected at a rate of 30%. In this way, by changing the selection ratio of the internal mode depending on the set value, it is possible to have the gameability of estimating the set value by estimating the internal mode set after the reset process.

  Returning to FIG. 49, after the transition destination internal mode setting process (step B1604), the effect control device 70 releases the game number from a plurality of game number zones divided by the number of game executions based on the set internal mode. A release zone determination process for determining a release zone to be performed is executed (step B1605).

  Next, the effect control device 70 executes a cancellation game number setting process for determining and setting a detailed cancellation game (specified number of times) from the determined cancellation zone (step B1606). Note that the specified number of times may be directly determined (selected) without determining (selecting) the release zone. The release game (specified number of times) may be determined in such a way that all values up to the ceiling (maximum number of games) of each internal mode may be determined, or set in advance. You may determine by the method of selecting from several choices.

  After that, the production control device 70 executes production mode setting processing for selecting and setting the winning probability of the lottery transition to the mission zone from among low accuracy, high accuracy, and ultra high accuracy (step B1607), and game management information The update process ends. In this case, based on the end of the special game state or the end of the specific game state, a signal indicating that is output to an external device having a function of counting and displaying the number of executed games, and the external device Then, since the number of game executions counted by this signal is reset, the reset specific signal output setting process (step B1508) is not executed.

  In the game management information setting process and the game management information update process, when the reset process is performed, a process for notifying that the reset process has been performed in the main display 3 or the sub display 310 is performed. Thus, the player may be notified that the reset process has been executed. In other words, the effect control device 70 may be provided with a reset notification means capable of executing a reset notification indicating that the reset processing is executed by the reset processing means.

  In this case, in the game management information setting process, in the case of the first game after the setting change or the reset process by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the notification is restricted, and the player can change the setting (the setting to the same setting). It is also possible to prevent the RAM from being cleared. In other words, the effect control device 70 may be provided with a reset notification restricting means for restricting reset notification by the reset notification means when a reset process is performed due to establishment of a predetermined reset condition.

  From the above, the number of executions of the game accompanied by the variable display of the plurality of reels 6 is counted, and a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is generated based on the fact that the number of executions has reached a predetermined number of times set in advance. The slot machine 1 that can be controlled as described above, and based on a predetermined operation that can be executed by the player, reset processing means that can execute reset processing for resetting the relationship between the number of executions and the specified number of times (Effect control device 70), state determination means (effect control device 70) capable of determining whether or not the current game state is a game state in which reset processing can be executed, and determination results of the state determination means On the basis of the above, a reset restricting means (effect control device 70) capable of restricting the execution of the reset process by the reset processing means is provided.

  Here, based on the fact that the number of executions has reached a predetermined number of times set in advance, the generation of a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player means that the specific gaming state is generated only by reaching the predetermined number of times. And generating a specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the prescribed number of times has been reached. Also, resetting the relationship between the number of executions and the specified number of times means updating (determining and setting) the remaining number of games until the number of times the game has been executed reaches the specified number of times. May be updated to a smaller value (initialization, increase, decrease, no change), or the specified number of times may be updated to a value larger than the number of game executions (initialization, increase, decrease, no change). However, both the number of executions and the specified number of times may be updated. In addition, when updating the number of executions or the specified number of times, it is possible to select (determine) some predetermined values in order or randomly by random selection (determination), or randomly select any value by lottery It may be (determined).

  Further, the state determination means (the effect control device 70) determines that the game state is not capable of executing the reset process for a predetermined period after the reset process is executed.

  Further, the predetermined period is a period until the number of executions initialized by the reset process reaches a predetermined number, and the reset processing means (production control device 70) sets the prescribed number of times to the number of game executions less than the predetermined number. It can be set. In other words, the predetermined period is a period from when the reset process is executed until a predetermined number of games are executed, and the reset processing means determines that the number of times the game has been executed before the predetermined number of games are executed. The relationship between the number of executions and the specified number of times can be reset so as to reach the specified number of times.

  In addition, there is provided a specific effect execution means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a specific effect that suggests over a plurality of games that the number of executions may reach the specified number of times, and a state determination means (The effect control device 70) determines that the game state is not capable of executing the reset process while the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means.

  In addition, the reset processing unit (production control device 70) can set reset information for executing reset processing based on a predetermined setting operation being performed during non-execution of the game. Means (production control device 70), and reset execution means (production control device 70) capable of executing a reset process based on a game start operation performed in the reset information setting state. Will be.

  Further, the reset processing means (the effect control device 70) cancels the reset information setting based on a predetermined release operation being performed while the game is not being executed (for example, while a predetermined release operation screen is being displayed). Reset information releasing means (production control device 70) that can be used.

  Further, the reset processing means (effect control device 70) is a standby state notification means (effect control device) capable of notifying that the reset information is set in the standby state in which the reset information is set by the reset information setting means (effect control device 70). 70).

  In addition, a waiting state transition means (effect control device 70) capable of shifting the slot machine 1 to a waiting state based on the fact that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period of time is provided. The production control device 70) continues to notify that it is in the standby state in which the reset information is set even in the customer standby state.

  Moreover, the reset notification means (effect control apparatus 70) which can perform the reset notification which shows that the reset process was performed by the reset process means (effect control apparatus 70) will be provided.

  The reset process includes a first reset process that is executed based on a first operation that can be executed by the player, and a second reset process that is executed based on a second operation that can be executed by the player. And the state determination means (production control device 70) can determine whether or not the current game state is a game state capable of executing the first reset process based on the first state determination value. State determination means (production control device 70) and second state determination means capable of determining whether or not the current game state is a game state capable of executing the second reset process based on the second state determination value (The production control device 70), and the second state determination value includes more game states than the first state determination value.

  Further, the reset execution means (the effect control device 70) performs a reset process on an external device capable of collecting various signals output from the slot machine 1 and counting and displaying the number of game executions. This means includes reset specific signal output means (production control device 70) capable of outputting a reset specific signal that can specify that it has been executed.

  In addition, a linked game means (production control device 70) that enables execution of a predetermined linked game by linking with an external server via a communication terminal possessed by the player, and during the linked game being executed by the linked game means Reset protection means (effect control device 70) capable of protecting the reset information from being set by the reset information setting means (effect control device 70).

  The reset protection means (production control device 70) sets a password necessary for setting the reset information based on the player's operation, and allows the setting of the reset information based on the input operation of the password. Will be doing.

[Pseudo bonus lottery processing]
Next, the pseudo bonus lottery process (step B1008) in the effect control process of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pseudo bonus lottery process according to the embodiment of the present invention. The pseudo bonus lottery process is a process of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the promoted lottery state ST360 and the pseudo bonus state (ST361 to ST363) in the non-AT state ST300.

  When the pseudo bonus lottery process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-AT state ST300 (step B1701). If the gaming state has already been transferred to the AT state ST350 (the result of step B1701 is “N”), the pseudo bonus lottery process need not be executed, and the pseudo bonus lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the non-AT state ST300 (the result of step B1701 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus flag is set (step B1702). . If the pseudo bonus flag is set (the result of step B1702 is “N”), the pseudo bonus lottery process is terminated because it is not necessary to execute the pseudo bonus lottery.

  When the pseudo bonus flag is not set (the result of step B1702 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a pseudo bonus according to the type of the internal winning combination (step B1703). ). The internal winning role for which a pseudo bonus is to be generated is one of Bellip A / B, Cherry Lip, Watermelon, Cherry, and the expected value in the order of Bellip A, Cherry Lip, Watermelon, Bell Lip B, Cherry Become. In other winning combinations (for example, Bell A, Bell B, single winning combination, etc.), the pseudo bonus is not generated. The internal winning combination for which the pseudo bonus is generated is a change prize that can be changed to promote (or demote) the pseudo bonus.

  Next, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus generation lottery has been won (step B1704). If not won (the result of step B1704 is “N”), the pseudo bonus lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the effect control device 70 has won the pseudo bonus generation lottery (the result of step B1704 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 selects the type of the pseudo bonus to be generated (step B1705). The types of the pseudo bonus are the first pseudo bonus (ultra-high accuracy, ultra-high expectation), the second pseudo bonus (high accuracy, high) according to the probability (expectation) of transition from the pseudo bonus state to the normal AT state ST351. Expectation) and a third pseudo bonus (low accuracy, low expectation). For example, the selection probability of each pseudo bonus is set to 5% for the first pseudo bonus, 35% for the second pseudo bonus, and 60% for the third pseudo bonus. If the pseudo bonus generation lottery is won, the process shifts from the normal zone ST310 to the specific effect zone ST330, and then shifts to the promoted lottery state ST360 included in the AT state ST350.

  Further, the effect control device 70 sets a pseudo bonus flag corresponding to the lottery result of the type of pseudo bonus to be generated (step B1706). The promotion lottery mode is drawn in accordance with the internal winning combination and the AT lottery probability (step B1707). The promotion lottery mode includes a low promotion mode and a high promotion mode, which are determined with reference to the table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining the promotion mode in the pseudo bonus state according to the embodiment of the present invention. As described above, the promotion mode in the pseudo bonus state is determined based on the internal winning combination (Bellip A / B, Cherry Lip, Watermelon, Cherry) and the AT lottery probability.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “Cherry Lip” and the AT lottery probability is “high probability”, the low promotion mode is selected with a probability of 90% and the high promotion mode is selected with a probability of 10%. When the AT lottery probability is “super high” for “Cherry”, the low promotion mode is selected with a probability of 25% and the high promotion mode is selected with a probability of 75%.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the effect control device 70 sets the promotion lottery mode corresponding to the lottery result of the promotion lottery mode in step B1707 (step B1708). When shifting to the pseudo bonus state, in order to execute a continuous effect, a continuous effect execution flag is set (step B1709), and the pseudo bonus lottery process is terminated. Although the pseudo bonus lottery process is performed only in the non-AT state ST300, the pseudo bonus lottery process is also executed in the normal AT state ST351, which is different from the case of the non-AT state ST300. If the pseudo-bonus generation lottery is won with a probability (low probability, high probability), the game performance is improved.

[Pseudo bonus promotion lottery process]
Next, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (step B1009) in the effect control process of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process according to the embodiment of the present invention. The pseudo bonus promotion lottery process determines whether or not the type (value) of the pseudo bonus state to be generated is promoted (ranked up or changed) in the promotion lottery state after the generation of the pseudo bonus state is determined. This is a process of performing a lottery.

  When starting the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process, the effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is the promotion lottery state (step B1801). If it is not in the promotion lottery state (the result of step B1801 is “N”), the type of the pseudo bonus state is not promoted, and the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is terminated.

  In the promotion lottery state (the result of step B1801 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the type of the pseudo bonus state can be promoted based on the result of the pseudo bonus lottery process. (Step B1802). If there is no possibility (necessary) to promote the type of the pseudo bonus state (when the occurrence of the first pseudo bonus state that is most advantageous to the player has already been determined) (the result of step B1802 is “N”) ), The pseudo bonus lottery process is terminated.

  The effect control device 70 sets the promotion lottery table corresponding to the promotion lottery mode when the type of the pseudo bonus state can be promoted (the result of step B1802 is “Y”) (step B1803). Further, whether or not to promote the type of the pseudo bonus state according to the type of the internal winning combination is drawn (step B1804), and whether or not the promotion lottery of whether to promote the type of the pseudo bonus state is won or not is determined. Judgment is made (step B1805).

  Then, when the effect control device 70 wins the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus state (the result of step B1805 is “Y”), the pseudo bonus flag corresponding to the promotion result is set (step B1809), and the pseudo bonus promotion is performed. The lottery process is terminated. In this case, the promotion lottery in the promotion lottery mode is not performed, but the promotion lottery in the promotion lottery mode may be performed.

  On the other hand, when the production control device 70 does not win the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus state (the result of Step B1805 is “N”), the promotion lottery mode is promoted (ranked up, Whether to change) or not (step B1806). Further, it is determined whether or not the promotion lottery in the promotion lottery mode has been won (step B1807). If the winner has been won (the result of step B1807 is “Y”), the promotion lottery mode corresponding to the promotion result is set ( Step B1808), the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is terminated. When the promotion lottery in the promotion lottery mode is not won (the result of step B1807 is “N”), the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the pseudo bonus state can be generated by the pseudo bonus lottery process (whether or not to shift to the promoted lottery state) and the type (value) of the pseudo bonus state to be generated are determined. decide. Then, the control in the promoted lottery state ST360 is executed by executing the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process based on the lottery result of the pseudo bonus lottery process.

[Continuous production control processing]
Next, the continuous effect control process (step B1106) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the continuous effect control process according to the embodiment of the present invention. The continuous effect control process is a process for controlling the continuous effect executed in the specific effect zone ST330 in the non-AT state ST300.

  The continuous effect is composed of a display effect and a sound effect, and the effect contents such as the type and number of effects are determined by the game effect determining process in step B1015 of the effect control process (FIG. 23). In addition, since the continuous effect corresponding to the set effect mode is executed, switching of the effect mode by the operation of the effect button 10 may be restricted during execution of the continuous effect.

  When the continuous production control process is started, the production control device 70 first determines whether or not there is a continuous production setting (step B2001). If there is no continuous production setting (the result of step B2001 is “N”), the process of step B2013 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a continuous effect setting (the result of step B2001 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not it is the game start timing (step B2002). If it is the game start timing (the result of step B2002 is “Y”), execution of stage effects according to the type of continuous effects and the remaining number of consecutive times is started (step B2003).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a stop operation of the reel 6 has been performed (step B2004). If the reel 6 has not been stopped (the result of step B2004 is “N”), the processing after step B2009 is executed. If the reel 6 is stopped (the result of step B2004 is “Y”), the stage effect being executed is advanced according to the number of reels 6 stopped (step B2005).

  Further, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the reel stop operation is a third stop operation (operation to stop the third (last) reel) (step B2006). When the stop operation of the reel 6 is the third stop operation (the result of step B2006 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the game being executed is the final game of the continuous effect (step B2007). . When it is the final game of the continuous effect (the result of step B2007 is “Y”), the execution of the notification effect according to the result of the continuous effect is started (step B2008).

  The notification effect in the present embodiment is an output of a notification sound (a hit notification sound, a miss notification sound) from the lower speaker, and the sub display 310 and the movable effect members (360, 370) are operated in accordance with the notification sound. Alternatively, only the operation of the sub display 310 or the movable effect member (360, 370) may be used.

  The effect control device 70 determines that the reel stop operation is not the third stop operation (the result of step B2006 is “N”), and if the game being executed is not the final game of the continuous effect (the result of step B2007 is “N”), the processing after step B2009 is executed.

  The effect control device 70 determines whether or not it is the game end timing (step B2009). If it is not the game end timing (the result of Step B2009 is “N”), the processing after Step B2013 is executed.

  In the case of the game end timing (the result of step B2009 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 ends the stage effect being executed and moves the movable member (sub-display 310, left movable effect device 360, right movable). The rendering device 370) is returned to the initial position (normal position) (step B2010). Further, it is determined whether or not the game being executed is the final game of the continuous effect (step B2011). If the game is the final game of the continuous effect (the result of step B2011 is “Y”), the continuous effect setting is performed. Is cleared (step B2012).

  The effect control device 70 determines whether or not the notification effect started in the process of step B2008 is being executed (step B2013). If the notification effect is not being executed (the result of step B2013 is “N”), the continuous effect control process is terminated.

  Furthermore, when the notification effect is being executed (the result of step B2013 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a predetermined time for continuing the notification effect has passed (step B2014). When the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step B2014 is “Y”), the execution of the notification effect is ended (step B2019), and the continuous effect control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step B2014 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the next game is started (step B2015). If the next game is not started (the result of step B2015 is “N”), the continuous performance control process is terminated. Although the notification effect is ended by the start of the next game, the notification effect may be ended by a betting operation (manual or automatic), an operation of the effect button 10, a medal payout operation, or the like.

  In addition, when the next game is started (the result of step B2015 is “Y”), the production control device 70 checks whether or not the execution factor of the continuous production is due to the addition of the number of AT sets (step B2016), and determination is made (step B2017).

  When the execution factor of the continuous effect is due to the addition of the number of AT sets (the result of Step B2017 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the notification effect is a specific result (Step S2017). B2018). The specific result in this case is that the AT set number was won. In the case of the notification effect of the specific result (the result of Step B2018 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 ends the continuous effect control process without ending the execution of the notification effect. On the other hand, if it is not the notification effect of the specific result (the result of step B2018 is “N”), that is, if it is a continuous effect by adding the number of AT sets and is not won, the execution of the notification effect is terminated. (Step B2019), and the continuous effect control process ends.

  The execution factors for continuous production include G number cancellation, pseudo bonus self-winning, AT self-winning, G number extra win, and set number extra win. Is not notified (the remaining number of AT sets is unknown without being notified in order to make the player feel excited). Therefore, in the case of a specific result (a set number extra winning), the notification effect is executed to the end to notify the player of the set number extra winning.

  In addition, in other winnings, the player can grasp the result by changing the display contents thereafter, but the notification effect may be executed to the end as the specific result for the addition of the number of games. In this case, it may be determined whether or not to execute the notification effect to the end according to the number of added games. Further, when the notice effect of the deviation result is being executed at the start of the next game, the notice effect is ended, but the notice effect may be continued regardless of the result.

〔Timing chart〕
Next, the execution (end) timing of the continuous effect and the notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing an example in the case where the next game is started after the end of the announcement effect according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 (A) shows from the start to the end of the continuous effect, and FIG. The details of the final stage production are shown. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the number of continuous effects is three.

  Time t10 is the timing at which the game that is the start of the continuous performance is started. Then, the game is finished by operating the reel stop buttons (24a, 24b, 24c), and then the first stage effect is finished.

  Thereafter, the player performs a bet operation and operates the start lever 21 to start the next game and start the second stage effect (time t11). Furthermore, when the executed game ends, the game corresponding to the last stage of the continuous effect is started (time t12), and the final stage effect is executed.

  Then, when the last game ends, a notification effect (notification effect) is started (time t13). The notification effect (notification effect) is an effect that is executed over a predetermined period (predetermined time) regardless of whether the result of the continuous effect is a specific result (pseudo B confirmation, addition confirmation) or a disapproval result. Since the notice effect (notification effect) is executed by the effect control device 70, the effect control device 70 serves as a notice effect means (notification effect means).

  In the example of FIG. 55, since the next game is not started while the notification effect is being executed, the notification effect continues for a predetermined time (step B2014). The notification effect is an effect of outputting a heavy bass notification sound using the lower speaker. In addition, the notice effect continues even after the progress of the final stage effect ends.

  Further, the final stage effect continues until the next game is started, but as shown in FIG. 55B, when the effect progress period in which the effect is actually executed ends (time t14), the next game Until the start of time (time t15), it is an effect stagnation period in which a still screen, repeated effects, etc. are executed.

  The effect progress period is a period during which the contents of the effect progress for a predetermined time from the start of the game or for a predetermined time from at least one of the stop operations. Note that each stage effect ends when the next game is started even in the effect progress period, and the effect corresponding to the next game is executed. The production stagnation period is a period in which the production content does not progress, and continues until the next game is started or the screen shifts to the customer waiting screen. Note that the stage effects before the final stage are basically composed of an effect progress period and an effect stagnant period.

  When the next game is started after the notification effect is completed, the normal effect of the main high-pitched sound (main subject) using the upper and lower speakers is executed.

  FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the next game is started before the end of the hit announcement effect according to the embodiment of the present invention, the continuous effect ends, but the notification effect does not end.

  The mode from the start of continuous production (time t20) to the start of final stage production (time t22) is the same as the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 56, after winning the mission lottery and finishing the game in the final stage effect, the notification effect corresponding to the winning (specific result) effect is executed (time t23). At this time, in order to correspond to the specific result, even if the next game start operation is performed (time t24), the winning effect is continued (time t25).

  Note that, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 56, since the continuous production is ended by the operation for starting the next game, the game control device starts the next game in response to the operation of the start lever 21 or the start lever 21. The production control device 70 that starts production for 50 and the next game serves as continuous production end means.

  As described above, even if the next game is started without waiting for the end of the continuous effect, the result of the continuous effect can be notified by the notification effect. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the continuous performance without reducing the number of games executed per unit time.

  In particular, as described above, if the lottery result cannot be determined by the production after execution of the continuous production, etc. (the remaining number of AT sets is not notified) and the number of AT sets is added and the notification effect is continued in the case of winning (second game value), etc. Good. That is, whether or not the notification effect is ended depends on the execution factor of the continuous effect (the type of the specific result, the game value to be given), so that the effect of the effect in the game can be changed to improve the interest of the game. it can. On the other hand, when it is possible to recognize that the player has been given a game value (first game value) by an effect after the end of the continuous effect (the remaining number of AT sets is notified), a notification is made when the continuous effect ends. The production may be ended.

  FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing an example in the case where the next game is started before the end of the off-stage notice effect according to the embodiment of the present invention, and the continuous effect and the notice effect are ended.

  In the example shown in FIG. 57, the start from the continuous effect to the execution of the notice effect (out of effect) is performed at the same timing as in FIG. 56 (time t30 to t33), but when the next game start operation is performed. (Time t34), the notification effect that would normally be executed until time t35 is interrupted. In addition, the next game is started before the final stage production progress period ends.

  As described above, when the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to prevent the execution of the normal effect in the next game from being hindered by configuring so that the next game can be started without continuing the notification effect. It is possible to allow a player to play a game at a good tempo. Note that, even if the lottery result is out of place, the next game may not be started until the notice effect is completed, as in the example shown in FIG. Since the normal effect is executed by the effect control device 70, the effect control device 70 serves as a normal effect means.

  In addition, only when the result of the continuous effect is a specific result, the notification effect is executed even if the next game is started. Therefore, the player determines whether or not the game value is given depending on whether or not the notification effect ends. It becomes possible to grasp. Moreover, since the effect mode of the normal effect in the next game changes depending on whether or not the notification effect is interrupted, the effect of the effect in the game can be changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of continuous production]
Subsequently, examples of effects of continuous effects and notification effects will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the process from the final stage effect to the notification effect and the start of the next game will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 58 is a transition diagram showing an example of a series of effects from the start of a continuous effect to the final stage effect according to the embodiment of the present invention. In the example shown in FIG. 58, a case will be described in which a winning combination (for example, “watermelon”) that generates a continuous effect is won in the normal AT state ST351.

  Referring to FIG. 58 (A), a winning combination for starting a continuous effect is won, a predetermined number of medals are paid out, and a payout sound (for example, “dendenden ♪”) is output. Thereafter, when the betting operation and the start lever 21 are operated to start the game, the next game is started.

  Further, since the gaming state is the normal AT state ST351, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), a push order display unit (push order display icon) 390 for notifying the push order of the reel stop button 24 is displayed. Then, the first stage effect is started, and it is notified that the continuous effect is started. At this time, the effect that the left movable member 361 of the left movable effect device 360 moves left and right is executed. The effect by the left movable effect device 360 is executed when the probability that the result of the continuous effect becomes the specific result is higher than the probability that the result is lost.

  Thereafter, a stop operation of each reel 6 is performed to end the game being executed, and a betting operation and a start operation for the next game are further executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the second stage effect is executed. Further, a stop operation is performed to end the game being executed, and subsequently, a betting operation and a start operation for the next game are executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the final stage effect is started. At this time, the left movable member 361 stops in a state where it can be visually recognized by the player.

  As described above, it is an effect aspect from the start of the continuous effect until the final stage effect is started. Thereafter, a notification effect based on the result of the continuous effect is executed. Hereinafter, typical patterns for the subsequent effects will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the production aspect from the final stage production of the continuous production to the start of the next game according to the embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram for explaining the case where the next game is started after the announcement production is completed. .

  FIGS. 59E and 59F show a state where the reel stop button 24 is operated in the instructed pressing order in the game in which the final stage effect is being executed. FIG. 59 (E) shows a state after the second reel stop button 24 is operated, and the final stage effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 58 (D).

  FIG. 59 (F) shows the effect progress period immediately after the game is ended by operating the last reel stop button 24, and FIG. 59 (G) shows the notice effect during the effect stagnant period of the final stage effect. Indicates a continuing state. When the last reel stop button 24 is operated, a notice effect is started. Announcement production is a result sound corresponding to the lottery result (for example, “Jowawa-don ♪” for out-of-game, “Zudo-do-don ♪” for specific results), and a deep bass sound from the lower speaker. Is output. FIG. 59 shows a case where the lottery result is a specific result. In the case of a deviation, the result sound may be output as a high tone or a middle tone so that it can be easily distinguished from the case of the specific result.

  Further, the notification effect may include not only the output of the result sound but also the effect by the movable effect device. Specifically, only when the lottery result is a specific result, as shown in FIG. 59F, the left movable member 361 of the left movable effect device 360 moves to the left and returns to the initial position, while the right movable effect. The right movable member 371 of the device 370 is moved leftward to a position where the player can visually recognize it. Furthermore, a set number addition notification unit 380 indicating the addition of the number of sets is displayed to notify that the number of sets has been added.

  When the announcement effect ends and the betting operation and the start operation of the next game are performed, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the normal AT state ST351 is continued, and the next game is started and an effect (in accordance with the internal lottery result) Display of a normal effect, display of a push order display part, etc.) are executed.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the production aspect from the final stage production of the continuous production to the start of the next game according to the embodiment of the present invention, and the next game is started during the execution of the notification production. It is a figure explaining the case where output does not end in the middle.

  FIGS. 60E and 60F are similar to FIGS. 59E and 59F. FIG. 60 (G) shows a state in which the next game is started by the player performing a betting operation and a start operation of the next game while the notification effect is being executed. At this time, since the result of the continuous effect is the specific result, the output of the result sound (notification sound, notification sound) is continued even after the next game starts. On the other hand, the right movable member 371 of the right movable effect device 370 is configured to return to the initial position, the display of the set number additional notification unit 380 is terminated, and the notification effect other than the result sound output is terminated.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining an effect aspect from the final stage effect of the continuous effect to the start of the next game according to the embodiment of the present invention, and the next game is started during the execution of the notice effect. It is a figure explaining the case where output does not end in the middle.

  61E and 61F are the same as FIGS. 59E and 59F. In addition, since the lottery result is out of date, the fact that the lottery result is out of date is displayed on the set number addition notification unit 380.

  FIG. 61 (G) shows a state in which the next game has been started by the player performing a betting operation and a start operation for the next game while the notification effect is being executed. At this time, since the lottery result is off, the output of the result sound is stopped. Furthermore, the right movable member 371 of the right movable effect device 370 returns to the initial position, the display of the set number addition notification unit 380 is terminated, and the normal effect in the next game is executed.

[Modification of continuous production]
Then, the modification of a continuous effect is demonstrated. The notification effect described so far outputs a notification sound for notifying the result of the continuous effect, but in this modification, a confirmed effect for notifying that the result of the continuous effect is the specific result is executed.

  FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing an example of a confirmed effect after the end of the continuous effect according to the embodiment of the present invention, where (A) shows the result of the continuous effect is out of place, and (B) shows the result of the continuous effect. The result is shown. FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the production aspect from the last stage production of the continuous production to the start of the next game in the modification of the embodiment of the present invention, and illustrates the case where the next game is started during the execution of the notification production. It is a figure to do.

  The mode from the start of continuous production (time t40) to the start of final stage production (time t42) is the same as the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (A), since the result of the continuous effect is out of play, the finalized effect is continued even after the final game in the continuous effect ends (time t43). Even before the time when the final stage effect ends (time t45), when the betting operation and the start operation for the next game are performed, the next game is started (time t44), and the normal effect of the next game is performed. Executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 62 (B), the time elapses from the start of the continuous effect (time t50) to the end of the last game in the continuous effect (time t53) at the same timing as in FIG. 62 (A). At this time, since the result of the continuous effect is the specific result, the confirmed effect is executed at the timing when the last game in the continuous effect ends (time t53, FIG. 63 (B)).

  Thereafter, when a betting operation and a start operation for the next game are performed, the next game is started (time t54), but the final effect is continuously executed until time t55 (FIG. 63C). As in the case of the notification effect, the final effect is output as a heavy bass using the lower speaker. In addition, when the next game is started while the confirmed effect is continued, the normal effect for the next game is a high-pitched main (main subject) effect using the upper speaker until the confirmed effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the finalized effect of this modification, the display of the set number additional notification unit 380 is continued even when the next game is started, but is the same as the case where the result of the continuous effect is the specific result. In addition, the display of the set number addition notification unit 380 may be terminated together with the start of the next game. Moreover, although the definite sound output by the definite effect is an output different from the specific result sound when the result of the continuous effect is the specific result, it may be the same.

  Although the control of the notification effect of the result of the continuous effect described above is accompanied by the start operation of the next game, it may be a case where a settlement input is accepted instead of the start operation of the next game, for example. . That is, when the player performs an operation of paying out medals from credits during execution of the final stage effect of the continuous effect, if the result of the continuous effect is a specific result, the notification effect is executed (continued). By configuring in this way, even if the credit is settled, the necessary notification effect is executed without executing the unnecessary notification effect, so that the game value is given depending on whether or not the notification effect ends. The player can grasp whether or not the game is performed.

[Pseudo bonus promotion production]
Next, the pseudo bonus promotion effect will be described. The pseudo bonus promotion effect is an effect that is executed when the type (value) of the pseudo bonus state (ST361 to ST363) to be subsequently generated in the promotion lottery state ST360 is promoted (ranked up or changed). In the pseudo bonus state, the AT lottery is executed with a predetermined probability, and when the prize is won, the state shifts to the normal AT state ST351 after the end of the pseudo bonus state.

  First, the pseudo bonus promotion effect control process (step B1107) in the timer interruption process of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pseudo bonus promotion effect control processing according to the embodiment of the present invention. The pseudo bonus promotion effect control process is a process for executing a promotion effect corresponding to a process number or a promotion effect corresponding to a preset notification level in the promotion lottery state ST360.

  When the pseudo bonus promotion effect control process is started, the effect control device 70 branches according to the process number (step B2101).

  When the process number is 0, the effect control device 70 executes a promotion effect start process. The promotion effect start process is a process executed at the start of the promotion effect, and sets a process number corresponding to a preset notification level. Details of the promotion effect start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the process number is 1, the effect control device 70 executes a clear promotion effect process. The clear promotion effect process is a process of executing an effect of clearly informing the result of the promotion lottery about the effect contents in the promotion mode and whether or not the promotion has been promoted. Details of the clear promotion effect process will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the process number is 2, the effect control device 70 executes a normal promotion effect process. The normal promotion effect process is a process of executing an effect of clearly informing whether or not the promotion in the promotion mode is ambiguous about the result of the promotion lottery, but whether or not the promotion has been promoted. Details of the normal promotion effect process will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the process number is 3, the effect control device 70 executes an ambiguous promotion effect process. The ambiguous promotion effect process is a process of executing an effect that informs about the result of promotion lottery in an ambiguous manner about the content of the promotion in the promotion mode and whether or not the promotion has been promoted. Details of the ambiguous promotion effect processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the procedure of the promotion effect start process will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the promotion effect start process according to the embodiment of the present invention. The promotion effect start process is a process that is first executed after shifting to the promotion lottery state ST360, and sets a process number in accordance with the setting of notification that the player is in the promotion lottery state ST360 and the mode of the promotion effect set in advance. To do.

  The production control device 70 first determines whether or not the promoted lottery state ST360 has been started (step B2201). If the promotion lottery state ST360 is not started (the result of step B2201 is “N”), the promotion effect is not executed, and thus the promotion effect start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the promotion lottery state ST360 is started (the result of step B2201 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 is in the promotion lottery (promotional lottery state ST360) on the main display 3 and the sub-display 310. The display of the background image indicating the presence is set (step B2202).

  Further, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the execution of the promotion effect is set to be effective (step B2203). If the execution of the promotion effect is not set to be valid (the result of step B2203 is “N”), the promotion effect is not executed, and the promotion effect start process is terminated. Whether or not the promotion effect can be executed is set in the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  When the execution of the promotion effect is set to be effective (the result of Step B2203 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets the display of the notification level image of the promotion effect on the main display 3 (Step B2204). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the notification level of the promotion effect is “clear” (step B2205).

  When the notification level of the promotion effect is “clear” (the result of step B2205 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets the effect process number to 1 (step B2206). Further, the movement of the left and right movable effect members (361, 371) is set according to the current promotion lottery mode (step B2207).

  On the other hand, when the notification level of the promotion effect is not “clear” (the result of step B2205 is “N”), the effect control device 70 sets the effect processing number to 2 (step B2208), and further, It is determined whether or not the notification level is “normal” (step B2209).

  If the notification level of the promotion effect is not “normal” (the result of step B2209 is “N”), the effect control device 70 sets the effect processing number to 3 because the notification level of the promotion effect is “ambiguous”. (Step B2212). Further, the display of the bonus ambiguous image is set without moving the sub display 310 (step B2213).

  When the notification level of the promotion effect is “clear” or “normal” (the result of step B2209 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 displays the sub-display at the position corresponding to the pseudo bonus flag. The movement of 310 is set (step B2210). Further, the display of the bonus image corresponding to the pseudo bonus flag is set on the sub display 310 (step B2213).

[Clear promotion effect processing]
Next, the clear promotion effect process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a procedure of clear promotion effect processing according to the embodiment of the present invention. The clear promotion effect process is a process executed when the notification level is set to “clear” in the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process. As described above, when the notification level is set to “clear”, the contents of the effect in the promotion mode and whether or not the promotion has been made are clearly notified.

  When the clear promotion effect process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether or not it is in a state that can be promoted (a state in which the type of pseudo bonus state and the promotion lottery mode can be promoted) ( Step B2301). When the promotion is not possible (the result of Step B2301 is “N”), the processing after Step B2315 is executed.

  In the state where promotion is possible (the result of step B2301 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether the type (value) of the pseudo bonus state can be promoted (ranked up, changed). (Step B2302). If the type of the pseudo bonus state cannot be promoted (the result of Step B2302 is “N”), the processing after Step B2315 is executed.

  When the type of the pseudo bonus state can be promoted (the result of step B2302 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether it is the game start timing (step B2303). In the case of the game start timing (the result of step B2303 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the promotion target combination is won (step B2304). When the promotion target combination (for example, Bell Lip A / B, Cherry Lip, Watermelon, Cherry) is won (the result of Step B2304 is “Y”), the swing (up and down movement) of the sub display 310 is set ( Step B2305). As a result, it is possible to notify that there is a possibility that the type (value) of the pseudo bonus state is promoted (ranked up, changed), and an effect control device that controls the operation of the sub display 310 and the sub display 310. 70 constitutes a notice effect control means.

  The effect control device 70 does not start the game (the result of step B2303 is “N”), does not win the promotion target role (the result of step B2304 is “N”), or shakes the sub-display 310. When the movement setting is completed, it is determined whether or not the final reel is in a stopped state (step B2306).

  When the final reel is stopped (the result of step B2306 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 further determines whether or not the sub display 310 is swinging (step B2307). When the sub display 310 is swinging (the result of step B2307 is “Y”), the stop of swinging of the sub display 310 is set (step B2308).

  The production control device 70 determines that the final reel is not stopped (the result of step B2306 is “N”), the sub display 310 is not swinging (the result of step B2307 is “N”), or When the setting of the swing stop of the display 310 is completed, it is determined whether or not the game is finished (step B2309). If the game has not ended (the result of step B2309 is “N”), the processing after step B2315 is executed.

  When the game is over (the result of step B2309 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is promoted (step B2310). When the type of the pseudo bonus state is not promoted (the result of Step B2310 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the promoted lottery mode is promoted (Step B2311). When the promotion lottery mode is not promoted (the result of Step B2311 is “N”), the processing after Step B2315 is executed.

  When the promotion lottery mode is promoted (the result of step B2311 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets the initial position return of the left movable member 361 and the movement of the right movable member 371 (step B2312).

  On the other hand, when the type of the pseudo bonus state is promoted (the result of step B2310 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets the movement of the sub display 310 to the position corresponding to the pseudo bonus flag (step S2310). B2313). Further, the display update of the sub display 310 is set in the image corresponding to the pseudo bonus flag (step B2314). That is, the effect control device 70 displays specific information that can specify the type of the pseudo bonus state given to the sub-display 310, so that the effect control device 70 and the sub-display 310 constitute specific information display means.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus lip winning corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus state to be generated has been established (step B2315). When the pseudo bonus lip is not won (the result of step B2315 is “N”), the clear promotion effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus lip winning is achieved (the result of step B2315 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 moves the left and right movable members (361, 362) and the sub-display 310 to the initial position (normal position). (Step B2316). Furthermore, the effect process number is set to 0 (step B2317), and the clear promotion effect process is terminated.

  In this way, the left and right movable members (361, 362) and the sub-display 310 are not returned to the initial positions until the winning of the pseudo bonus lip is established, that is, until the pseudo bonus state is entered. It is possible to immediately grasp the current situation (expected degree of pseudo bonus, etc.) even when the player leaves the table and resumes the game.

[Normal promotion effect processing]
Next, the normal promotion effect process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal promotion effect process according to the embodiment of the present invention. The normal promotion effect process is a process executed when the notification level is set to “normal” in the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process. As described above, when the notification level is set to “normal”, the effect in the promotion mode is ambiguous, but whether or not the promotion has been promoted is clearly notified.

  When the normal promotion effect process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether or not it is in a state in which promotion is possible (a type of pseudo bonus state or a state in which the promotion lottery mode can be promoted) ( Step B2401). When the promotion is not possible (the result of Step B2401 is “N”), the processing after Step B2407 is executed.

  In the state where promotion is possible (the result of step B2401 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether the type (value) of the pseudo bonus state can be promoted (ranked up, changed). (Step B2402). If the type of the pseudo bonus state cannot be promoted (the result of Step B2402 is “N”), the processing after Step B2407 is executed.

  When the type of the pseudo bonus state can be promoted (the result of Step B2402 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the game is over (Step B2403). If the game has not ended (the result of step B2403 is “N”), the processing after step B2407 is executed.

  When the game is over (the result of step B2403 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the type of the pseudo bonus state is promoted (step B2404). When the promotion lottery mode is not promoted (the result of step B2404 is “N”), the processing after step B2407 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the type of the pseudo bonus state is promoted (the result of step B2404 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets the movement of the sub display 310 to the position corresponding to the pseudo bonus flag (step S2404). B2405). Further, the display update of the sub display 310 is set to the image corresponding to the pseudo bonus flag (step B2406).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus lip winning corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus state to be generated has been established (step B2407). If the winning of the pseudo bonus lip is not established (the result of step B2407 is “N”), the normal promotion effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus lip winning is achieved (the result of step B2407 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 returns the sub-display 310 to the initial position (normal position) (step B2408). Further, the effect process number is set to 0 (step B2409), and the normal promotion effect process is terminated.

[Ambiguous promotion effect processing]
Finally, the ambiguous promotion effect process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure of ambiguous promotion effect processing according to the embodiment of the present invention. The ambiguous promotion effect process is a process executed when the notification level is set to “ambiguous” in the pseudo bonus promotion effect setting process. As described above, when the notification level is set to “ambiguous”, the contents of the effect in the promotion mode and the notification of whether or not the promotion has been made are ambiguous.

  When the ambiguous promotion effect process is started, the effect control device 70 first determines whether or not it is in a state where promotion is possible (a type of pseudo bonus state and a state where promotion lottery mode can be promoted) ( Step B2501). When the promotion is not possible (the result of Step B2501 is “N”), the processing after Step B2508 is executed.

  In the state where promotion is possible (the result of Step B2501 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether it is the game start timing (Step B2502). In the case of the game start timing (the result of step B2502 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the promotion target combination is won (step B2503). When a promotion target combination (for example, Bell Lip A / B, Cherry Lip, Watermelon, Cherry) is won (the result of Step B2503 is “Y”), the swing (up and down movement) of the sub display 310 is set ( Step B2504).

  The effect control device 70 does not start the game (the result of step B2502 is “N”), does not win the promotion target combination (the result of step B2503 is “N”), or shakes the sub-display 310. When the movement setting is completed, it is determined whether or not the final reel is in a stopped state (step B2505).

  When the final reel is stopped (result of Step B2505 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 further determines whether or not the sub display 310 is swinging (Step B2506). If the sub display 310 is swinging (the result of step B2306 is “Y”), the stop of swinging of the sub display 310 is set (step B2307).

  The effect control device 70 determines that the final reel is not stopped (the result of Step B2505 is “N”), the sub-display 310 is not swinging (the result of Step B2506 is “N”), or When the setting of the swing stop of the display device 310 is completed, it is determined whether or not the promoted lottery state has ended (step B2508). If the promotion lottery state has not ended (the result of step B2508 is “N”), the ambiguous promotion effect processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the promotion lottery state is finished (the result of step B2508 is “Y”), the production control device 70 sets the production process number to 0 (step B2509), and ends the ambiguous promotion production process.

[Example of pseudo bonus promotion production]
Next, a specific aspect of the pseudo bonus promotion effect will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of an effect informing the promotion lottery mode of the embodiment of the present invention, where (A) is a normal promotion effect and an ambiguous promotion effect, and (B) is a clear promotion in the case of a low promotion mode. Production, (C) shows a clear promotion production in the high promotion mode.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (A), in the case of the normal promotion effect and the ambiguous promotion effect, the notification effect in the promotion lottery mode is not executed, and the left movable member 361 and the right movable member 371 do not move. .

  In the case of the clear promotion effect, as described above, the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the player can recognize the promotion lottery mode. As shown in FIG. 69 (B), in the low promotion mode, the promotion lottery mode is notified by the left movable member 361 of the left movable effect device 360 moving to the front of the main display 3. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69C, in the case of the high promotion mode, the promotion lottery mode is notified by the right movable member 371 of the right movable effect device 370 moving to the front of the main display 3. .

  It should be noted that “CHANCE” is displayed on the left movable member 361 of the left movable effect device 360 and “hot!” Is displayed on the right movable member 371 of the right movable effect device 370, and the right movable member 371 has moved. In this case, the player can recognize that the type (value) of the pseudo bonus state has a higher expectation for promotion (ranking up, changing).

  In the present embodiment, two stages of promotion lottery modes of “high promotion mode” and “low promotion mode” are defined, but there may be more stages. For example, when notifying that the mode is most advantageous in the case of three stages, the left movable member 361 and the right movable member 371 may be moved simultaneously.

  Next, notification of the internal lottery result will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of effects for informing the internal lottery result according to the embodiment of the present invention, where (A) shows a BAR bonus, (B) shows a normal bonus, and (C) shows a super bonus.

  As shown in FIGS. 70A to 70C, the type of the pseudo bonus state (value of the specific gaming state) is notified by the arrangement and display contents of the sub-display 310. In this embodiment, the value is set so as to increase in the order of (A) → (B) → (C), that is, the value is set so as to increase as the position of the sub-display 310 increases. Yes.

  In this way, by changing the position of the sub-display 310 in accordance with the type (expected degree, value) of the pseudo bonus state, the player can grasp the change (expected degree) of the generated pseudo bonus state. it can. Further, by notifying the pseudo bonus state (expected degree) according to the display content of the sub-display 310, it becomes possible to notify the type (expected degree) of the pseudo bonus state more accurately. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively produce a change in the type (expectation) of the pseudo bonus state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the promoted lottery state ST360, the sub display 310 is raised every time the type of the pseudo bonus state is promoted. Furthermore, not only the type of the pseudo bonus state is promoted, but also the type of the pseudo bonus state may be demoted. In this case, the sub display 310 is controlled to be raised or lowered according to the type of the pseudo bonus state after the transition (change). By controlling in this way, the player can clearly grasp the change in the pseudo bonus state that occurs.

  In this way, the sub display 310 is configured to move each time the type of the pseudo bonus state is changed, and the effect control device 70 that controls the operation of the sub display 310 and the sub display 310 is specified. The suggestion production means which suggests that the value of the game state was changed is made.

  Next, the pseudo bonus promotion effect (elevation lottery mode and notification of the internal lottery result) will be described along the flow of the game. 71 and 72 are diagrams illustrating a series of effects in the pseudo bonus promotion according to the embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 71 (A) shows a state in which the transition to the promoted lottery state ST360 (occurrence of a pseudo bonus state) is confirmed in the non-AT state ST300. As described above, the promotion lottery state ST360 shifts to a case where a predetermined combination is won in the normal zone ST310 or the number of games is canceled in the specific effect zone ST330. At this time, the sub display 310 displays information (“WIN”) indicating that the sub display 310 is placed in the normal position (initial position) and shifts to a state advantageous to the player (promotional lottery state ST360).

  FIG. 71 (B) shows a state in which a bet operation is executed after the transition to the promoted lottery state ST360 is confirmed. At this time, the main display 3 is informed that it is in the promoted lottery state ST360, and it is also informed that the promoted lottery mode is the low promoted mode by moving the left movable member 361. Note that while the left movable member 361 is positioned in front of the main display 3, a light emission effect is executed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the left movable member 361. At this time, the sub-indicator 310 is arranged in the lower stage, and indicates that the type of the pseudo bonus to be generated is a result of a low expectation level (a type of pseudo bonus having a low value for the player) that shifts to the normal AT state ST351. Information ("BAR bonus") is displayed.

  Thereafter, when a game start operation is performed, rotation of each reel 6 is started as shown in FIG. At this time, the winning combination won is notified to the main display 3. Then, when the player performs a stop operation of the reel 6, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), a “replay” winning is established. At this time, a notification sound (“pepe!”) Corresponding to the winning of “Replay” is output. Since the “Replay” winning is established, the next game can be started without performing a betting operation.

  Further, when the game start operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the next game is started and the main display 3 is informed that the “watermelon” that is the promotion target role has been won. At this time, the sub display 310 swings (promotion suggestion effect), and it is suggested that the type of the pseudo bonus state is promoted (step B2305 in FIG. 66). In this way, by executing the promotion suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player expect in advance that the type of the pseudo bonus state may be promoted, and the game performance can be improved.

  Thereafter, when the reel 6 is stopped, a “watermelon” winning is established and a corresponding notification sound (“dendenden ♪”) is output. Further, the sub-display 310 is moved from the lower stage to the middle stage, and it is notified that the transition-destination pseudo bonus state has shifted from the third pseudo bonus state ST363 to the second pseudo bonus state ST362 (elevation notification effect). The promotion of the pseudo bonus state is also notified by the main display 3. Although the type of the pseudo bonus state is changed by winning the promotion target combination and winning the promotion lottery, it may be a condition that a winning is achieved.

  Further, when a bet operation and a game start operation are performed, the next game is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), the main display 3 is notified of the winning combination (winning of the promotion target combination), and the sub-display 310 starts swinging again (promotion suggestion effect). Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation, the promotion lottery mode shifts from the low promotion mode to the high promotion mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), the promotion in the promotion lottery mode is notified to the main display 3, and the left movable member 361 is returned to the initial position, and the right movable member 371 is placed in front of the main display 3. It is also notified by moving. Note that there is no promotion of the pseudo bonus, and the swing of the sub display 310 in FIG. 72 (G) is a so-called gusset effect, so the swing of the sub display 310 stops.

  Thereafter, when a bet operation and a game start operation are performed, the next game is started as shown in FIG. At this time, the main display 3 is notified of the winning combination, and the stop order (push order) of the reel stop button 24 is also notified.

  Then, when the stop operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), “Bell A” is won and a notification sound (“terror terror terror ♪”) is output. Thereafter, when a bet operation and a game start operation are performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (K), the main display 3 is notified of the winning combination (winning of the promotion target combination), and the sub-display 310 swings again. (Promotion suggestion). Furthermore, when the player performs a stop operation, as shown in FIG. 72 (L), the sub display 310 is raised (promotion notification effect), and the type of the pseudo bonus state is promoted on the main display 3. Is notified. When the type of the pseudo bonus state is demoted during the promoted lottery state, the sub-display 310 is moved down (demotion suggestion effect) and the sub-display 310 is lowered by the player's stop operation. (Demotion notification effect) It may be notified on the main display 3 that the type of the pseudo bonus state has been demoted. By making the promotion suggestion effect and the demotion suggestion effect the same mode, it becomes possible to give a player's expectation and frustration as to whether to promote or demote, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that the promotion effect may be executed by moving the sub-display 310 at the timing of the operation of the effect button 10, the betting operation (manual or automatic) for the next game, the start operation of the next game, or the like. Further, the promotion effect may be executed in a game after the actual promotion game. Further, the promoted lottery state may be generated during the pseudo bonus state.

  Furthermore, when the role to be promoted is elected, the sub display 310 may not be moved (moved up and down), but the movable effect member may be moved (infested) or may be promoted to the sub display 310. An effect that suggests a certain situation may be displayed.

  Further, the type of the pseudo bonus state can be promoted by lighting or blinking of the low / high probability mode display part (320, 330) or the first / second expectation degree display part (340, 350) behind the sub display 310. It may be possible to suggest sex, or any combination of them may suggest the possibility of promotion of the type of pseudo bonus state. In addition, when the type of the pseudo bonus state changes step by step, the sub display 310 also moves step by step. However, when the state changes in a plurality of steps, the sub display 310 also changes according to the step that changes. To move.

[Modified example of pseudo bonus promotion effect]
The above is an example of the pseudo bonus promotion effect in the present embodiment, but here, other modified examples other than those illustrated will be described. First, a description will be given of a modification of the effect related to the promotion of the type of pseudo bonus state. FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a first modification of the promotion effect of the type of pseudo bonus state according to the embodiment of the present invention, where (A) is a one-stage promotion and (B) is a two-stage promotion. It is a figure which shows an example.

  First, an example of one-stage promotion will be described. Referring to FIG. 73A, (a1) shows a state in which the sub display 310 is arranged at a default position (normal position, initial position). (A2) is a state in which the promotion target role is won in the state of (a1) and the promotion suggestion effect is executed. In this modification, “strong” and “weak” are defined in the promotion suggestion effect, and in the case of one-level promotion, the “weak” promotion suggestion effect is executed.

  After the end of the game being executed or a predetermined operation after the end, as shown in (a3), the sub-display 310 is temporarily raised, and the promotion notification effect is returned to the default position. The predetermined operation after the end is, for example, an operation of an effect button, a betting operation (manual or automatic), a start operation of the next game, or the like. In the one-step promotion notification effect, the sub-display 310 does not move to the upper end position of the liquid crystal display window 9d, but moves from the upper end position to a position about ¼ of the height of the liquid crystal display window 9d.

  When the sub display 310 returns to the default position, as shown in (a4), the sub display 310 is updated to a display corresponding to the promoted pseudo bonus. After that, when the winning combination is won, the promotion suggestion effect (weak) is executed again as shown in (a5).

  Further, when the pseudo bonus is promoted, as shown in (a6), a promotion notification effect is executed, and as shown in (a7), the sub-display 310 is updated to a display corresponding to the pseudo bonus after promotion. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus is not promoted, as shown in (a8), the promotion notification effect is not executed and the state returns to (a4).

  Next, the two-stage promotion will be described. Referring to FIG. 73B, first, (b1) shows a state in which the sub-display 310 is arranged at the default position (normal position, initial position) as in (a1). Thereafter, when the role to be promoted is elected, as shown in (b2) and (b3), the high probability mode indicator 320 and the low probability mode indicator 330 are alternately lit (flashing) (elevation suggestion selection (strong)). .

  Then, after the end of the game being executed or a predetermined operation after the end, as shown in (b4) and (b5), the sub-display 310 is temporarily raised, and the promotion notification effect is returned to the default position. In the two-stage promotion notification effect, the sub-display 310 is set so that the movement range of the sub-display 310 is larger than the at least one-step promotion notification effect (for example, up to the upper end position of the liquid crystal display window 9d). Move. In the case where the pseudo bonus state is demoted, it is preferable to execute a demoting notification effect in which the sub-display 310 is once lowered in the moving range corresponding to the demoting stage and then returned to the default position.

  In this way, by executing the presentation in a different manner depending on the number of stages of promotion of the pseudo bonus, it becomes possible for the player to grasp how much the expectation level of the pseudo bonus has changed.

  Next, another modified example of the pseudo bonus promotion effect will be described. 74 and 75 are diagrams illustrating a second modification of the pseudo bonus promotion effect. FIG. 74 shows the promotion effect in the promotion lottery mode, and FIG. 75 shows the promotion effect of the pseudo bonus. In this modification, unlike the above-described embodiment, the promotion lottery mode is notified by the position of the sub display 310, and the type of the pseudo bonus state generated by the main display 3 and the left and right movable effect devices (360, 370) is notified. To do.

  Referring to FIG. 74, when the normal promotion effect or the ambiguous promotion effect is set, as shown in (A), the sub-display 310 is arranged at the normal position (initial position, default position), and the notification content Also make it ambiguous. On the other hand, when the clear promotion effect is set, as shown in (B) when the promotion lottery mode is the low-accuracy mode, as shown in (B), when the promotion lottery mode is the high-accuracy mode (C ), The sub-display 310 is arranged at the upper end position.

  Further, even when an ambiguous promotion effect or a normal promotion effect is set, the sub-display 310 may be raised or lowered. In this case, it may be lowered and then raised, or lowered and then raised (so-called gas effect).

  Next, the notification of the type of the pseudo bonus state will be described. In the present modification, information indicating the promotion lottery state and the identification display image 391 indicating the type of the pseudo bonus state are displayed on the main display 3.

  As shown in FIG. 75A, in the case of a BAR bonus (transition to the third pseudo bonus state ST363), both the left and right movable members (361, 371) are not movable, and only the identification display image 391 is displayed. The In the present modification, after the transition to the pseudo bonus state, the size of the identification display image 391 is displayed as the probability of transition to the normal AT state ST351 increases.

  As shown in FIG. 75B, in the case of a normal bonus (transition to the second pseudo bonus state ST362), only the left movable member 361 moves and the identification display image 391 is displayed in a medium size. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75C, in the case of a super bonus (transition to the first pseudo bonus state ST361), only the right movable member 371 moves and the identification display image 391 is displayed in a large size.

  It should be noted that the sub-display 310 may be swung (up and down) when the role to be promoted is won while notifying the promotion lottery mode, or may be swung (in / out) on the movable effect member, or the main display 3 may display an effect suggesting that the movable effect members (361, 371) operate.

  Further, the type of pseudo bonus may be suggested (notified) only by the operation state (operation pattern) of the movable effect members (361, 371). Further, a display unit may be provided on the movable effect members (361, 371) so that the type of pseudo bonus can be displayed.

[Additional notice production]
Next, a modification example in which the AT display is added using the sub display 310 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of an additional suggestion notification effect according to the embodiment of the present invention, where (A) is a normal position, (B) is an additional suggestion notification operation 1, and (C) is an additional suggestion notification operation 2. Indicates.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (A), in the added AT state ST352, the sub-display 310 is disposed at the lowermost part of the liquid crystal display window 9d, and the fact that it is in the added AT state ST352 and the number of remaining games are displayed. Thereafter, in the additional AT state ST352, when the additional target combination is won, an additional suggestion notification operation is executed according to the reliability or the like.

  FIGS. 76B and 76C show an example of the extra suggestion notification operation, but the reliability of (C) is higher than that of (B). Specifically, when the additional target combination is won in the additional AT state ST352, the sub display 310 swings and the display content is updated as shown in (B). When the reliability is higher, in addition to the swinging of the sub-display 310, the second expectation display unit 350 (and / or the first expectation display unit 340) is notified. In addition, you may give a clearer suggestion by changing the display content of a sub-display according to an addition expectation degree (reliability). The case where the reliability is higher is, for example, a case where the probability of being added is high (or determined), and may be a case where the number of added games is large.

  FIGS. 77A and 77B are diagrams for explaining an example of an extra notification effect according to the embodiment of the present invention, in which FIG. 77A is a one-shot low-up notification operation, FIG. 77B is a one-shot-high addition notification operation, and FIG. The operation is shown.

  In the notification of the added number, as shown in FIGS. 77 (A) and (B), the sub display 310 is moved with an increase width corresponding to the added number of games. At this time, the range of increase may be set in two stages of low addition and high addition, or the movement width may be set in stages for each number of games to be added, or set steplessly. A position corresponding to the number of games may be calculated and specified.

  Further, in the case of a special addition in which an additional number is continuously added until the continuous lottery leaks, as shown in FIG. 77C, the sub-display 310 is raised every time the number of games is added. Also good. In addition, special addition is a continuous operation addition (one that adds a number of games by performing a continuous lottery for each operation of the start lever, stop button, production button, etc. after the game ends), and 0 extra games (during the game) During the freeze production that occurs in the game, the number of games is added by performing a continuous lottery for each operation of the start lever, stop button, production button, etc. or one game consecutive lottery (adding the number of games by performing a continuous lottery every game) Is applicable).

  It should be noted that an extra notification operation may be performed automatically when the reel 6 is stopped or when the game is ended, but an additional notification operation may be performed based on the operation of the effect button after the game ends. Further, when the next game is started without operation of the effect button, only the number of added games is notified (displayed) with the sub display 310, the main display 3, and the sound effect without moving the sub display 310. Good.

[Discharge notification control]
Finally, medal payout control will be described. The payout notification control process is executed in step B1108 of the timer interrupt process in FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of payout notification control processing according to the embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not a payout start command has been received (step B2601). If the payout start command has not been received (the result of step B2601 is “N”), the processing after step B2606 is executed.

  On the other hand, when receiving the payout start command (the result of step B2601 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the single winning combination A or the single winning combination B (second winning combination) is paid out. (Step B2602). In the case of paying out a single winning combination A or B (the result of step B2602 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a non-AT state ST300 (step B2603). When the gaming state is not the non-AT state ST300 (the result of Step B2604 is “N”), the processing after Step B2606 is executed.

  In the case of a winning combination (first winning combination) in which the single winning combination A or the single winning combination B is not paid out (the result of step B2602 is “N”), the effect control device 70, or the single winning combination A or the single winning combination B And the current gaming state is the non-AT state ST300 (the result of step B2603 is “Y”), the output of the payout sound (sound effect) corresponding to the payout start command (notification effect) Is started) (step B2604). Further, a paying flag is set (step B2605). Even in the AT state ST350, a payout sound may be output at the time of paying out the single winning combination A and the single winning combination B.

  The payout start command can identify the type of winning combination, and the payout sound (sound effect) corresponding to the payout start command corresponds to the winning combination. Specifically, when the winning role is “Bell A” or “Bell B”, the payout sound 1 (“terror terror ... terror”), and when the winning role is “Watermelon” or “Cherry”, 2 ("Denden ... Den"), if the winning role is a replay system (pseudo B lip 1-2, bell lip AB, cherry lip, replay), payout sound 3 ("pepe"), In the case of “one-sheet combination A” or “one-sheet combination B”, the payout sound 4 (“Pyrolon”) is obtained. In the case of a replay system, a sound may be output in the form of a winning sound instead of blinking the payout notification lamp 16 instead of the payout sound.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not actual payout has been started (step B2606). The actual payout means that a medal is actually paid out from the medal payout port 28 by the medal payout device (hopper) 63, not being added to the credit. When the actual payout is started (the result of step B2606 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 starts blinking of the payout notification lamp 16 (a kind of notification effect) (step B2607). The blinking pattern of the payout notification lamp 16 is common regardless of the winning winning combination, but may be different for each winning combination. It should be noted that the payout notification lamp is not flashed during addition to credit only in the case of actual payout, but may be flashed over a payout period including addition to credit.

  Further, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the payout interruption condition is satisfied (step B2608). The payout interruption condition is, for example, a case where a hopper error has occurred. The hopper error includes an empty error in which medals to be paid out are insufficient and a medal clogging error in the medal flow path.

  When the payout interruption condition is satisfied (the result of Step B2608 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 interrupts the output of the payout sound (Step B2609). Further, the blinking of the payout notification lamp 16 is interrupted (step B2610).

  Next, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the payout resumption condition is satisfied (step B2611). The payout resumption condition is, for example, a case where the hopper error is resolved by the error determination of the reset operation.

  When the payout resumption condition is satisfied (the result of step B2611 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 resumes outputting the payout sound (step B2612). Further, the blinking of the payout notification lamp 16 is resumed (step B2613).

  Next, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a payout end command has been received (step B2614). If the payout end command has not been received (the result of step B2614 is “N”), the processing after step B2620 is executed.

  On the other hand, when receiving the payout end command (the result of Step B2614 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 ends the blinking of the payout notification lamp 16 (Step B2615). Further, it is determined whether or not the payout of the single winning combination A or the single winning combination B has been completed (step B2616). When the payout of the single winning combination A or the single winning combination B has not ended (the result of step B2616 is “N”), the output of the payout sound is ended (step B2619).

  The effect control device 70 determines whether or not the gaming state is the non-AT state ST300 when the payout of the one-piece combination A or the one-piece combination B is finished (the result of Step B2616 is “Y”) ( Step B2617). If the gaming state is not the non-AT state ST300 (the result of step B2617 is “N”), the output of the payout sound is terminated (step B2619).

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the non-AT state ST300 (the result of step B2617 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 sets a payout sound delay timer (step B2618). In the present embodiment, when a winning combination is won in the non-AT state ST300, the output of the payout sound is continued (extended) for a predetermined time. The payout sound delay timer is a timer for measuring a time during which the output of the payout sound is continued.

  In this way, in the case of a single winning combination A or a single winning combination B (second winning combination), the production control device 70 can increase the output of the payout sound (notification sound) until a predetermined period after the payout ends. 2nd notification production | presentation means which alert | reports winning of 2 prizes is made. On the other hand, by terminating the output of the payout sound (notification sound) together with the end of the payout, it is possible to notify that the first winning combination other than the second winning combination has been won. A first notification effect means for notifying a combination is provided.

  The effect control device 70 determines whether or not the output of the payout sound is being delayed (step B2620). If the output of the payout sound is not delayed (the result of step B2620 is “N”), the payout notification control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the output of the payout sound is delayed (the result of Step B2620 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed (Step B2621). When the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step B2621 is “Y”), the output of the payout sound is ended (step B2623), and the payout notification control process is ended.

  If the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step B2621 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether a betting number command has been received (step B2622). When the betting number command is received (the result of step B2622 is “Y”), the output of the payout sound is ended (step B2623), and the payout notification control process is ended. If the betting number command has not been received (the result of step B2622 is “N”), the payout notification control process is terminated without terminating the output of the payout sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the output period of the payout notification sound is output over a period longer than the payout period for the single hand A and the single hand B that are difficult to recognize that the winning has been achieved. (The output end of the payout sound is slow). By controlling in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the insertion of medals (see FIG. 22) until the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 returns from the return state to the introduction state, and a selector error ( Occurrence of clogged medals) can be suppressed.

  Note that the combination for extending the output of the payout sound is not limited to a single combination, but may be a cherry with a small number of payouts.

  In addition, the upper limit of credits is usually 50 for both addition by manual insertion and addition by payout, but it is always added to the credit when paying out a single hand A and a single hand B You may set the upper limit of addition by manual injection to 48 or 49.

  As described above, the effect control device 70 serves as notification effect means for notifying the winning of a winning combination during the payout of medals by outputting the payout sound and lighting or blinking the payout notification lamp 16.

  Subsequently, the operation for each winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIGS. 79 and 80 are timing charts for explaining the control at the time of paying out medals according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 79A is a timing chart when Bell A is established. The gaming state is common to the non-AT state ST300 and the AT state ST350. The credit is 47.

  Time t101 is the timing when the game ends and Bell A is established. When the bell A is established, nine medals are paid out, and the payout process is started at this timing. Also, a payout sound is output simultaneously with the start of the payout process. The output of the payout sound continues until the end of the payout period.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the upper limit of credit is 50, when 9 medals are paid out from the state where the credit is 47, 3 medals are added to the credit and 6 medals are obtained. Is paid out from the medal payout exit 28.

  The medal payout is continued until time t102 because priority is given to credit addition. The period from time t101 to time t102 is the credit addition period.

  When the addition to the credit is completed, the medal payout is started from the medal payout opening 28 by driving the hopper. Then, when nine medals are paid out (time t103), the medal payout is finished and the output of the notification sound is stopped (turns OFF). A period from time t102 to time t103 is an actual payout period in which medals are actually paid out. During the actual payout period, the payout notification lamp 16 blinks to notify that the medal is being paid out, and when the actual payout period ends, the payout notification lamp 16 is turned off.

  The flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 is basically converted from the capture state to the return state at the start of the game, and converted from the return state to the capture state at the end of the game.

  FIG. 79B is a timing chart when the bell B or the watermelon is established. The gaming state is common to the non-AT state ST300 and the AT state ST350 as in the case of (A). The credit is 0.

  When the bell B or the watermelon is established, the number of medals to be paid out is 4 and the credit is 0. Therefore, all medals to be paid out are added to the credit. Therefore, when the payout process is started after the game ends (time t201), the payout process is ended without paying out medals from the medal payout exit 28 (time t202). Accordingly, the payout notification lamp 16 remains off.

  FIG. 80A is a timing chart when a cherry is established. The gaming state is common to the non-AT state ST300 and the AT state ST350 as in the case of FIG. 79 (A). Further, the credit is 50 which is the upper limit value.

  When the cherry is established, the number of medals to be paid out is one and the credit is 50, so that medals are paid out from the medal payout exit 28. Therefore, when the payout process is started after the game ends (time t301), a payout sound having a length corresponding to the payout period is output, and during this time, the payout notification lamp 16 blinks. Thereafter, when the payout process ends (time t302), the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 is converted from the return state to the take-in state.

  For cherries that are easy to grasp if there is a payout from the appearance of the reel (game result), a payout sound is output according to the payout period. May be output.

  FIG. 80B is a timing chart when the one-piece combination A or the one-piece combination B is established. The gaming state is a non-AT state ST300. Further, the credit is 50 which is the upper limit value.

  When the single winning combination A or the single winning combination B is established, the medal payout number is 1 and the credit is 50, as in the case of the cherry winning, and the medal is paid out from the medal payout opening 28. When the payout process is started after the game ends (time t401), as described above, a payout sound for a period longer than the length corresponding to the payout period is output (time t403). The period during which the payout notification lamp 16 flashes is a length corresponding to the payout period (time t402).

  Thereafter, when the payout process ends (time t302), the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 is converted from the return state to the take-in state. In order to prevent medal clogging, it is desirable that the output of the payout sound is stopped after the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 has been converted to the take-in state. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the insertion of medals until the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 changes from the return state to the take-in state. The occurrence of abnormality can be effectively suppressed.

  If the inserted medal does not reach the return port 931, the output of the payout sound may be stopped before it is completely converted into the take-in state. Also, since the output of the payout sound continues after the medals are paid out, it is possible to recognize that the winning has been established even when the player is not looking at the reel, and the player can perform the medal insertion operation. It becomes possible to delay. Further, it is possible to give an illusion that more medals are paid out than the actual one, and it is possible to give a player a sense of profit.

  Further, the payout sound of the single winning combination A or the single winning combination B in the AT state ST350 is output only during the payout period like the cherry, but may not be output. In addition, for a combination with one payout number such as cherry, one-piece combination A, and one-piece combination B, medals are not paid out from the medal payout port 28, so the payout notification lamp 16 does not have to blink. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of payouts (one) by the single combination A or single combination B is less than the upper limit (3 or 2) of the betting number of medals, and the award medal is added to the credit. There is no payout. According to the present embodiment, since it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the winning of a single combination that is difficult to recognize the winning is established, as described above, the abnormality in the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 Can be effectively suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the progress of the game is performed by changing the output mode of the payout sound to the normal winning combination (first winning combination) for the specific winning combination (second winning combination) that is likely to cause an abnormality. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of abnormality while reducing the inhibition. In addition, since the notification effect for the first winning combination and the notification effect for the second winning combination are started at a common timing, the process for executing the notification effect can be simplified.

[Modified example of payout notification control]
Finally, a modified example of the modified example of the payout notification control will be described. FIG. 81 is a timing chart for explaining the control at the time of paying out medals when a single winning combination A or a single winning combination B is established according to a modification of the embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 81A is a timing chart of the first modification. The gaming state is a non-AT state ST300. In the first modification, the payout notification lamp 16 is lit from the start of the payout process (time t501) to the end (time t503). The output of the payout sound is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the payout process (time t502). Note that the period until the output of the payout sound stops (time t504) is longer than the payout period, as in FIG. 80B, but may be shortened by delaying the output start timing.

  FIG. 81B is a timing chart of the second modification. The gaming state is a non-AT state ST300. In the second modification, the payout notification lamp 16 is similarly turned on from the start of the payout process (time t601) to the end (time t602), but the output of the payout sound is started at the end timing of the payout process. . The payout sound output period (time t503) may be a time corresponding to the payout period because the output start timing is delayed. Further, it may be continued until the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 is converted to the take-in state.

  Thus, according to this modification, since the start time of the notification effect differs depending on whether the winning combination is the first winning combination or the second winning combination, the player can win the winning combination established by the start time of the notification effect. Can be grasped.

  As described above, in the payout notification control in the present embodiment and its modification, when a winning combination (single winning combination A / B) that is difficult for the player to win is won, the player inserts a medal and the flow path In order to prevent medal clogging from occurring in the switching mechanism (medal selector) 93, it is possible to delay the player's medal insertion by delaying the end of the output of the payout sound. Thereby, the possibility of causing medal clogging can be reduced.

  Note that the flow path switching mechanism (medal selector) 93 is changed from the taking-in state to the returning state only when the credit is full in order to allow the insertion of medals even during the game, You may make it convert into a capture state from a return state by completion | finish of a game. In this way, medals can be inserted even after the automatic betting operation is performed after the replay winning is established.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The configuration not particularly described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 82 is a front view of the slot machine 610 (ie, gaming machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component (member) same or equivalent to the component (member) demonstrated in FIG. 1 of 1st Embodiment, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted. In the second embodiment, the image display device (main display device) 3 is provided as an option and may be omitted.

  The operation order display device 620 notifies the operation order (push order) of the reel stop buttons 24 (24a, 24b, 24c), and includes a plurality of operation order display units 620a, 620b, 620c. The left operation order display portion 620a corresponds to the left reel 6a and the left reel stop button 24a, is disposed on the upper side of the left reel 6a so as to face the left reel 6a, and indicates the operation order of the left reel stop button 24a. Inform. The central operation order display section 620b corresponds to the middle reel 6b and the middle reel stop button 24b, and is disposed on the upper side of the middle reel 6b so as to face the middle reel 6b. The operation order of the middle reel stop button 24b is indicated. Inform. The right operation order display unit 620c corresponds to the right reel 6c and the right reel stop button 24c, and is disposed on the upper side of the right reel 6c so as to face the right reel 6c. The operation order of the right reel stop button 24c is indicated. Inform.

  The operation order display units 620a, 620b, and 620c may display numbers (1, 2, 3) of the operation order of the corresponding reel stop button 24 using, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a 7-segment lamp. Color) The operation order may be displayed using an LED lamp or a polarizing sheet in color (operation order 1 is “red”, operation order 2 is “green”, and operation order 3 is “blue”).

  The G counter value display device (counter value display device, counter value notification device) 623 displays the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter. The G counter value display device 623 constitutes a counter notification device (counter notification means) that can notify the player of the counter value of the game number counter. In the second embodiment, the G counter value display device 623 is composed of three 8-segment lamps, but may be composed of a liquid crystal display device. The 8-segment lamp is obtained by adding one point-like light emitting portion (lamp) to a normal 7-segment lamp. The bonus notification light emitting unit 625 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and notifies the establishment of the S-BIG winning combination or N-BIG winning combination by lighting.

  The left-press notification light emitting unit 627 includes a light-transmitting part having a shape of a left arrow (←) and an LED, and if necessary, emits light in the shape of a left arrow, thereby operating in the left direction (reverse pressing) (right, Middle, left). The eye pressing suggestion unit 629 suggests a symbol combination mode (symbol row) to be aligned (to press) on the symbol formation line. For example, the eye suggestion portion 629 includes a translucent portion (light emitting area) having a character shape of the character pattern “GATE” and an LED, and emits light with the character shape of “GATE”, thereby “GATE” in the chance zone or the like. To the player to align (hold) on the symbol formation line.

  The G counter value display device 623, the bonus notification light emitting unit 625, the left push notification light emitting unit 627, and the eye push suggesting unit 629 are disposed on the left side of the reel 6 and on the right side of the left protruding decorative portion 647. The left projecting decorative portion 647 is a portion projecting forward at the center of the left end of the slot machine 610, and includes the G counter value display device 623, bonus notification light emitting unit 625, left press notification light emitting unit 627, and eye pressing suggesting unit 629. 610 makes it difficult to see from the left side. The left protruding decorative portion 647 is provided with a frame light emitting device 7 (medium light emitting decorative portion 7c).

  The ART light emitting unit 631 is composed of a full color LED lamp, and lights up during the ART state. The light emitting unit 631 during ART may change the lighting color according to the number of ART stocks. The chance zone light emitting unit 633 is configured by an LED, for example, and lights up during a chance zone 1-4 (CZ1-4) described later. The ART remaining game number display unit 635 can be constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a plurality of 7-segment lamps, and displays the remaining number of games in one ART state. The total acquired number display section 637 can be constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a plurality of 7-segment lamps, and displays a net increase number of medals.

  The ART light emitting part 631, the chance zone light emitting part 633, the ART remaining game number display part 635, and the total acquired number display part 637 are arranged on the right side of the reel 6 and on the right side of the right protruding decoration part 649. The right protruding decorative portion 649 is a portion that protrudes forward at the center of the right end of the slot machine 610, and includes the ART light emitting portion 631, the chance zone light emitting portion 633, the ART remaining game number display portion 635, and the total acquired number display portion 637. It is difficult to see from the right side of the machine 610. The right protruding decorative portion 649 is provided with a frame light emitting device 7 (medium light emitting decorative portion 7c).

  FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the slot machine 610 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, and shows a state in which the front panel 9 constituting the front surface is removed at the center of the slot machine 610 in the vertical direction.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the G counter value display device (counter notification device) 623 is provided at a position deeper behind the front panel 9 (ie, the front surface). Therefore, the G counter value display device 623 is difficult to view from an oblique direction other than the front of the slot machine 610. Specifically, the three 8-segment lamps that are the counter value display unit 623a of the G counter value display device 623 are arranged to constitute the bottom 643a of the recess 643 formed by being surrounded by the surrounding wall 641.

  FIG. 84 is a horizontal sectional view (II cross section of FIG. 83) of a part of the slot machine 610 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The entire G counter value display device 623 is disposed behind the surrounding wall 641. As shown in FIG. 84, the surrounding wall 641 has a divergent shape that spreads toward the outside in front of the slot machine 610 at least in a horizontal plane. A transparent member 651 is provided in front of the surrounding wall 641 so as to close the opening on the front side (outside) of the surrounding wall 641.

  On the left side of the surrounding wall 641, a left protruding decorative portion 647 of the slot machine 610 is provided. The left protruding decorative portion 647 makes it difficult to visually recognize the G counter value display device 623 from the left side of the slot machine 610, and therefore, it is difficult to see the G counter value display device 623 from a person other than the player in front.

  FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a control system of the slot machine 610 (ie, gaming machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component (member) same or equivalent to the component (member) demonstrated in FIG. 9 of 1st Embodiment, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The effect control device 70 (control means) is based on the game information related to the game supplied from the game control device 50, the operation order display device 620, the G counter value display device 623, the bonus notification light emitting unit 625, the left-press notification light emitting unit. 627, the eye suggestion unit 629, the ART light emitting unit 631, the chance zone light emitting unit 633, the ART remaining game number display unit 635, the total acquired number display unit 637, and the movable accessory 653 are controlled.

  The effect control device 70 functions as a game number counter (game number counting unit) by using, for example, a variable stored in a memory (RAM 70c, storage unit) as a counter. The effect control device 70 serves as a counter changing means, and is related to the change in the number of executions of the variable display game (variable display game) accompanying the variable display of the reel 6, and the value of the game number counter (variable in the RAM 70c), that is, the counter value. (GBS) can be varied.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control device 70 basically sets the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter to 1 (normal subtraction value, normal decrease amount) every time a variable display game (variable display game) is executed. ), And in a specific chance zone (CZ4) or the like, the counter value (GBS) is subtracted by a subtraction value (a large subtraction value or a large decrease amount) greater than one. The initial value of the counter value (GBS) is, for example, 999. Then, when the counter value (GBS) decreases to a value equal to or less than a predetermined value (0 in the present embodiment), the effect control device 70 can generate the ART state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. is there. In this way, the effect control device 70 functions as specific game state generating means.

  FIG. 86 is an arrangement diagram of symbols formed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 6a, middle reel 6b, and right reel 6c provided in the slot machine 610 of the second embodiment of the present invention. The outer peripheral surface may be constituted by a reel seal (sheet).

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the second embodiment, on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c, “yellow 7” (arrangement number 1 of the left reel 6a, etc.), “blue 7” (arrangement of the left reel 6a). No. 2 etc.), “White 7” (Sequence No. 3 etc. of the left reel 6a), “GATE”, Design A (Sequence No. 13 of the left reel 6a, etc.), Design B (Sequence No. 14 of the left reel 6a, etc.) Six types of identifiable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. The symbol A has the shape of the lower part of the number “7”, the symbol B has the shape of the upper part of the number “7”, and the symbol A and the symbol B are combined to form the entire number “7”. It comes to take shape.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram of a symbol combination aspect (symbol sequence) and winning contents of each combination of the slot machine 610 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. If the reels 6a, 6b, 6c are stopped, any of the symbol combination modes (symbol rows) shown in FIG. 87 is formed in the symbol formation line of the symbol display window 9a (display window portion). The winning of the winning role is established (confirmed).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when a symbol combination mode (symbol row) is formed on any of the five symbol formation lines (upper, middle, lower, right-up, and right-down) in the symbol display window 9a, a prize is awarded. Established. The effective line is the middle symbol formation line, and based on the symbol on the effective line, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination mode (symbol row) is formed on the symbol formation line. For example, a combination of stop symbols of “blue 7, blue 7, blue 7” (blue 7 aligned) on the lower symbol formation line corresponding to the normal replay winning combination is “white 7, yellow 7, yellow” It is determined that the combination “7” has been formed.

  In the slot machine 610 of the second embodiment, “Super Big Bonus (S-BIG) Winner”, “Normal Big Bonus (N-BIG) Winner”, “Regular Bonus (REG) Winner”, “Short Role A Winner (8 At least one of “Bonus”, “Bonus B Winner (Replay Winner)”, “Poor C Winner (One-Board)” and “Loose” is won by internal lottery. Two types of winnings may be won simultaneously (double winning). In this way, any one of bonus winning, small role winning, and losing is determined by internal lottery.

  Similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the slot machine 610 is provided with an internal lottery function for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to win various prizes in relation to the execution of the variable display game of the reel 6. Thus, by operating the start lever 21, an internal lottery is performed based on a random number for internal lottery. When the internal lottery is won, a winning flag is set, and generation of a predetermined winning combination (winning mode) is permitted.

  In other words, only when the internal lottery is won and the winning flag is raised, the predetermined symbol combination mode is allowed to stop on the symbol formation line and form the winning mode, so that the reel can be obtained as much as possible. 6 stop control is performed. In the variable display game of the reel 6, the symbol aimed by the player's stop operation is not stopped reliably, but only the symbol combination mode of a predetermined winning combination corresponding to the winning flag is displayed on the symbol formation line by the player's operation. It is possible to stop.

  The S-BIG winning combination is stopped on the symbol formation line (on the effective line) of the S-BIG symbol combination of “symbol A, symbol A, symbol A” or “symbol B, symbol B, symbol B”. With the bonus winning combination established in the case of being made, the S-BIG state, that is, the first bonus (BN1) state can be generated. If the S-BIG winning combination is established, the S-BIG until the player's medal payout number in a single S-BIG state exceeds the upper limit of 248 (equivalent to a net increase of 160). The state continues. When the number of medals paid out by the player in one S-BIG state exceeds the upper limit value of 248, the S-BIG state is terminated and the state shifts to the ART state (specific game state).

  The N-BIG winning combination stops on the symbol formation line (on the effective line) where the N-BIG symbol combination mode such as “symbol B, symbol B, symbol A” or “symbol A, symbol A, symbol B” With the bonus winning combination established when displayed, the N-BIG state, that is, the second bonus (BN2) state can be generated. If the N-BIG winning combination is established, the N-BIG will continue until the number of medals paid out by the player in a single N-BIG state exceeds the upper limit of 72 (equivalent to a net increase of 50). The state continues. When the number of medals paid out by a player in one N-BIG state exceeds the upper limit of 72, the N-BIG state is terminated and the state shifts to the ART state (specific game state).

  The REG winning combination is a bonus winning combination that is established when the REG symbol combination mode of “White 7, White 7, White 7” (white 7 aligned) is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol formation line (on the effective line). Thus, the third bonus (BN3) state can be generated as the chance zone 3 (CZ3). If the REG winning combination is established, the CZ3 state continues until the player's medal payout number in a single CZ3 state exceeds the upper limit of 4 (corresponding to a net increase of 6). If the number of medals paid out by a player in one CZ3 state exceeds the upper limit of four, the CZ3 state is ended and the state is shifted to the ART state, or in a predetermined case (described later), the normal gaming state is restored. .

  That is, in the slot machine 1, in the bonus state as an advantageous special game state, medals are awarded (paid out) exceeding a predetermined maximum number of game values (for example, 248, 72, 4). Based on this, it is possible to end the bonus state. For example, in the bonus state, a medal is awarded by winning a small combination A (eight winning combinations), and the winning probability of the small combination A becomes very high during the bonus state.

  A normal winning combination (small combination) is a winning combination that is established (determined) when small combination A, small combination B, or small combination C is stopped and displayed on one symbol formation line. Eight medals are paid out when the winning combination is established, and one medal is paid out when the small role C (single winning combination) is established. The small role B is a replay winning combination in which a replay game is performed after the reels stop. In this replay game, the reel 6 variable display game can be started without newly betting a bet (betting operation).

  The small combination A is a small combination from which a payout equivalent to a so-called bell small combination is obtained, and is also referred to as a bell for convenience. For the small roles A-1, A-2, A-3, and A-4, the symbol combination mode “yellow 7-yellow 7-yellow 7” (yellow 7 aligned) is in the middle, right-up, right-down, and upper-stage. It is established (determined) when it is stopped on the symbol establishment line. The small combination A-5 is established when the symbol combination mode “blue 7-yellow 7-yellow 7” is stopped and displayed on any symbol establishment line.

  The small combinations A-1, A-2, and A-3 correspond to a rare small combination (medium), a rare small combination (strong), and a rare small combination (weak), respectively. The small roles A-1 (rare small role (medium)), A-2 (rare small role (strong)), and A-3 (rare small role (weak)) are bonuses (S-BIG, N-BIG, REG). (Winning), ART, chance zone 4 (CZ4), which will be described later, can be won simultaneously (duplicate wins), and the degree of expectation to win simultaneously is rare small role (strong)> rare small role (medium)> rare small It becomes a role (weak) relationship. Furthermore, as will be described later, in the small roles A-1, A-2, and A-3 that are elected simultaneously (duplicate winning) with the chance zone 4 (CZ4), there are a rare small role with a sign and a rare small role with no sign. is there.

  The small role A-4 is a push order bell that stops the left reel first, and in the case of a push order bell win, the order in which the reels are stopped (the operation order of the plurality of reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c). If “Yellow 7-Yellow 7-Yellow 7” stops on the upper symbol formation line, winning is established (confirmed), and the order in which the reels are stopped (operation order) is incorrect Only at the probability of 1/9, “Yellow 7-Yellow 7-Yellow 7” stops on the upper symbol formation line and a winning is achieved. For other small roles, regardless of the order of operation, winning may be established (determined) if each reel is stopped at a predetermined symbol, or only when the predetermined operation order is established (determined) )

  When the small combination A-5 is established during a chance zone (CZ), which will be described later, the small combination A-5 falls from the chance zone (CZ) and enters a normal gaming state, and is also called a falling bell.

  Among the small roles B (Replay winning combination), the small roles B-1, B-2, B-3, B-4, B-5 (Lip 1, Lip 2, Lip 3, Lip 4, Lip 5) Replay winning combination established when the symbol combination mode “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” (blue 7 assortment) is stopped and displayed on the lower, upper right, lower right, middle and upper symbol formation lines. It is. The small combination B-6 (Lip 6) is a replay winning combination established when the symbol combination mode “blue 7-blue 7-yellow 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol formation line. The small combination B-7 (Lip 7) is a replay winning combination established when the symbol combination mode “GATE-GATE-GATE” is stopped and displayed on one symbol formation line. The small role B-8 (Lip 8) is a replay winning combination that is established when the symbol combination mode “GATE-GATE-GATE” is stopped and displayed on two symbol formation lines (for example, middle and lower right). is there.

  The small role B-1 (Lip 1) is a normal replay which is a normal replay, and the small roles B-1 to B-8 are special replays for shifting from the current gaming state to another gaming state. (Special prize). The small combination B-2 (Lip 2) is a replay winning combination (preparation replay) that occurs in the preparation RT state before entering the ART state. The small combination B-3 (Lip 3) is a replay winning combination (ART entry replay) for entering the ART state from the preparation RT state. Note that the small role B-3 (Lip 3) may be stored in a state other than the preparation RT state by simultaneously winning the ART and adding one set (= 50 games) of the ART stock as the ART generation right. The small role B-4 (Lip 4) is a replay winning combination (CZ2 rush replay, middle tier replay) for simultaneous entry (duplicate win) to CZ2 in Chance Zone 2 (CZ2), and in CZ2 It is also a replay winning combination (replay for continuous operation, middle stage replay) that raises the ART winning probability in the case of being consecutive. The small role B-5 (Lip 5) is a replay winning combination (CZ1 rush replay, upper tier replay) for simultaneously winning (duplicate winning) in the chance zone 1 (CZ1) and entering CZ1.

  When the small role B-6 (Lip 6) is established during the chance zone (CZ), the small role B-6 falls from the chance zone (CZ) and returns to the normal gaming state, or falls from the ready RT state. It is a replay winning role that shifts to the bell spill state. The bell spilled state is a penalty state when the small role A (bell) is missed. The small role B-7 (Lip 7), during the Big Bonus (BIG), in the ART state, or in the chance zone 1 (CZ1), is set to one set of ART stock that is the right to generate ART at the same time as winning the ART. = 50 games) Replay winning combination that is added and stored. A small role B-8 (Lip 8) is a replay that holds and stores multiple sets of ART stock at the same time during the Big Bonus (BIG), ART state, or Chance Zone 1 (CZ1). It is a winning role.

  The small role C is a role for production having a large meaning of the production, and increases the decrease amount of the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter. Each of the small roles C-1, C-2, C-3, and C-4 has a symbol combination mode of “white 7-design A-design A”, “white 7-design A-GATE”, and “white 7-GATE-design”. This is established when “A” and “White 7-GATE-GATE” are stopped and displayed on the middle symbol formation line.

  89 (A) and 89 (B) are diagrams illustrating games in the ART state in the slot machine 610 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 89A, during the ART state, the operation order (push order) of the plurality of reel stop buttons (stop operation units) 24a, 24b, 24c is notified to the operation order display device 620. The operation order display device 620 includes a plurality of operation order display units 620a, 620b, and 620c corresponding to the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c, respectively. When a player presses a plurality of reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c in the order of operation, mainly the replay winning combination (small role B) and other small roles A and C (eight role, one role) To establish.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (B), when the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c are pressed in the operation order notified to the operation order display device 620 to stop the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c, The symbol combination mode of the small role or the replay winning combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol formation line. FIG. 89 (B) shows an example in which the symbol combination mode “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” (blue 7 alignment) of Lip 1 is stopped and displayed on the lower symbol formation line.

  FIG. 90 is a state transition diagram of the gaming state in the slot machine 610 according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the slot machine 610, it is assumed that the variable display game is started in the normal gaming state immediately after the power is turned on. The gaming state includes a bonus state and a non-ART state and an ART state in addition to the bonus state. In the second embodiment, the variable display game (variable display game) is advanced with three bets regardless of the gaming state.

  The non-ART state will be described below. The non-ART state includes a normal gaming state and the states of chance zones 1, 2, and 4 (CZ1, CZ2, and CZ4). These chance zones may be referred to as non-ART medium chance zones 1, 2, 4 (non-ART medium CZ1, 2, 4).

  In the normal gaming state, the GBS subtraction lottery regarding the subtraction of the counter value (GBS) is executed. The GBS subtraction lottery includes a lottery (i.e., a lottery of a rare small role) whether or not the counter value (GBS) is greatly subtracted (decreased) by entering the chance zone 4 (CZ4). The decrease amount of the counter value (GBS) other than CZ4 (that is, the normal decrease amount) is 1 for each game. However, in CZ4, the decrease amount of the counter value (GBS) for each game is larger than the normal decrease amount. Also grows. Note that the normal decrease amount may be a value other than 1 by lottery or the like.

  Further, in the normal gaming state, there are a low probability state and a high probability state with respect to a bonus winning probability, a chance zone winning probability, and the like. You may make it perform the lottery for changing between a low probability state and a high probability state at the time of a small role winning prize winning. In addition, the chance probability of winning in the chance zone is determined by the middle replay winning (small role B-4), the upper replay winning (small role B-5), or the rare small role winning simultaneously in the chance zone 4 (CZ4) (small role A- 1, A-2, A-3).

  The normal gaming state also includes a precursor state before entering the chance zone 4 (CZ4). When a rare small combination with a sign is established among the rare small combinations (small combinations A-1, A-2, A-3) that are elected simultaneously with CZ4, the player enters CZ4 via the precursor state. On the other hand, when a rare small combination without a sign among the rare small combinations (small roles A-1, A-2, A-3) won simultaneously with CZ4 is established in the normal gaming state (only the precursor state is acceptable). Does not enter CZ4, but the number of CZ4 stocks (the number of CZ4 stocks) that is the right to enter CZ4 increases. The CZ4 stock is stored and held in a memory (RAM 70c, storage unit). One CZ4 stock is equivalent to 10 games (10G).

  Chance zone 1 (CZ1 during non-ART) is in the RT (replay time) state, and the winning probability of the internal lottery of the replay winning (small role B winning) increases. When the upper stage replay winning (small role B-5) is established, the game shifts from CZ4 or from the normal gaming state to CZ1. Each time a small role B-7 (one-line "GATE-GATE-GATE") is established in CZ1, only one set (one) of ART stock is added and stocked (accumulated). The One ART stock means a game (ART game) in an ART state of one set (= 50 games). The number of ART stocks, that is, the number of ART stock sets, is stored and held in a memory (such as the RAM 70c). Each time a small role B-8 (two-line "GATE-GATE-GATE") is established in CZ1, a plurality of sets (multiple) of ART stock are added and stocked. As described above, if the eye suggestion portion 629 emits light with the character shape “GATE”, an effect of causing the eye suggestion portion 629 to emit light while staying in CZ1 is given to the player with the symbol “GATE”. ".

  CZ1 continues for 10 games (10G), and when an ART stock occurs in CZ1, transitions to the ART state (specifically, the preparation RT state before the ART state) after CZ1 ends. The degree of expectation (ART expectation) for entering the ART state from CZ1 is 33%. If ART stock does not occur during CZ1, the original state (ie, normal gaming state or CZ4) is restored after CZ1 ends. If the small combination A-5 (falling bell) or small combination B-6 (lip 6) is established in CZ1, it falls from CZ1 and returns to the normal gaming state.

  The chance zone 2 (non-ART CZ2) is in the RT (replay time) state, and the winning probability of the internal lottery of the replay winning (small role B winning) increases. When the middle stage replay winning (small role B-4) is established, the game shifts from CZ4 or from the normal gaming state to CZ2. Every time a middle stage replay winning (small role B-4) is established during CZ2, an ART lottery is conducted as to whether or not to enter the ART, and one set of ART stock is awarded if the player wins. Note that the degree of expectation for entering the ART state from CZ2 (ART expectation degree) is basically 30%, but every time a middle stage replay winning is established during CZ2, the ART winning probability is increased to increase the ART expectation degree. Further, every time the middle stage replay winning is established, the main display 3 performs an effect suggesting that the ART expectation increases, and the sound effect is output from the speaker 4.

  CZ2 continues for 3 games (3G), and transitions to the preparation RT state before entering the ART state after the end of CZ2 when the ART is won during CZ2. If the ART is not won during CZ2, the original state (that is, the normal gaming state or CZ4) is restored after CZ2 ends. If the small combination A-5 (falling bell) or the small combination B-6 (lip 6) is established in CZ2, it falls from CZ2 and returns to the normal gaming state.

  Chance zone 4 (CZ4 during non-ART) is not in the RT (replay time) state, but is in an extremely high probability state, and the winning probability of the internal lottery for the bonus winning or the small role winning is higher than the high probability state. . Further, in CZ4, the counter value (GBS) is greatly subtracted for each game (game), and the counter value (GBS) decreases by an average of 150 during the stay in CZ4. When a rare small combination with a sign is established among the rare small combinations (small combinations A-1, A-2, A-3), the game state shifts from the normal gaming state to CZ4 after entering the precursor state. In addition, you may make it transfer to CZ4 from a normal game state for every predetermined number of games (for example, every 111 games). Further, when the process shifts to CZ1 or CZ2 in the middle of CZ4, the process returns to CZ4 after CZ1 or CZ2 ends. In this case, it resumes from the middle stage of CZ4. In addition, when a rare small combination with no sign is established in the normal game state (only the sign state is acceptable), one CZ4 stock, which is a right to enter CZ4, is granted.

  CZ4 basically returns to the normal gaming state after 10 games (10G) have been continued. However, when the upper stage replay winning (small part B-5) or middle stage replay winning (small part B-4) is established during CZ4, the process shifts to CZ1 or CZ2 from the middle stage of CZ4. If the CZ4 stock is 1 or more, even if the CZ4 stock is returned to the normal gaming state after the end of the CZ4, it enters the CZ4 again through the precursor state. Even when the small combination A-5 (falling bell) or small combination B-6 (lip 6) is established during CZ4, the small combination falls from CZ4 and returns to the normal gaming state.

  Hereinafter, the ART state (specific game state) will be described. The ART state includes a state of a main ART state (G-RUSH state, ART main state) and a chance zone 1 and 2 during ART (CZ1 during ART, CZ2 during ART). When the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is 0 or less (predetermined value or less) (when GBS ≦ 0), the state shifts from the non-ART state to the ART state via the preparation RT state. Further, when an ART stock occurs, the state shifts to the ART state from each chance zone (CZ) in the non-ART state via the preparation RT state. Further, after the bonus state is completed, the bonus state is shifted to the ART state via the preparation RT state.

  When the bonus state is changed to the ART state (when GBS> 0), the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is incremented by 1 (normal subtraction value) every time the variable display game (variable display game) is executed during the ART state. ) May be reduced. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the ART state with GBS ≦ 0, the counter value (GBS) may not be decreased during the ART state.

  If there is an ART stock after the ART state ends, the state returns to the main ART state again via the preparation RT state. If there is no ART stock after the end of the ART state, the game is returned to the normal gaming state in principle, but if there is a CZ4 stock, the process proceeds to CZ4. When the state shifts to the ART state due to the GBS becoming zero or less (GBS ≦ 0), when returning to the normal gaming state after the end of the ART state, the GBS maximum value (for example, the normal initial value 999) starts from the GBS. The GBS count may be started with a value (for example, 990) obtained by subtracting the negative value (for example, −9) of the initial value as the initial value.

  The preparation RT state is an RT state for making preparations before entering the ART state. In the preparation RT state, when the small combination B-3 (ART entry replay winning combination, Lip 3) is established, the preparation RT state is shifted to the ART state (main ART state).

  The main ART state (G-RUSH state, ART main state) is performed in units of one game. One set is 50 games (G) excluding the extra number of games. The main ART state continues for the number of ART games (50 + α) obtained by adding the number of games (α) added to 50 games. The net increase in medals in the main ART state is about 2.1 / G. In the main ART state, ART stock is added (added) when the small combination B-3 (Lip 3), the small combination B-7 (Lip 7), or the small combination B-8 (Lip 8) is established. In addition, the number of extra games in the main ART state is determined by lottery by the establishment of the small combinations A-1, A-2, A-3 (rare small combination). In addition, the probability state of the lottery includes a low probability state and a high probability state. You may make it perform the lottery for changing between a low probability state and a high probability state at the time of a small role winning prize winning.

  During the ART chance zone 1 (ART CZ1), 10 games continue in the ART state. When the upper stage replay winning (small role B-5) is established, the state shifts from the main ART state (G-RUSH state) to CZ1 during ART, and returns to the main ART state (G-RUSH state) from CZ1 during ART after the end of 10 games. . The number of ART games is added by one game at the time of transition to CZ1 during ART, and the number of extra games is added by lottery by the formation of a rare small role staying in CZ1 during ART. The number of ART games does not decrease while staying at CZ1 during ART. It is the same as CZ1 during non-ART that an ART stock is added each time a small combination B-7 or small combination B-8 with the pattern “GATE” is established in CZ1. In addition, as described above, if the eye suggestion portion 629 emits light with the character shape of “GATE”, an effect of causing the eye suggestion portion 629 to emit light during the stay of CZ1 during ART is given to the player. Prompt to arrange “GATE”.

  In the ART chance zone 2 (ART CZ2), three games continue in the ART state. When the middle stage replay winning (small role B-4) is established, the state shifts from the main ART state (G-RUSH state) to CZ2 during ART, and returns to the main ART state (G-RUSH state) from CZ2 during ART after the end of three games. . The number of ART games is increased by one game when shifting to CZ2 during ART. The number of ART games does not decrease while staying at CZ1 during ART. When the middle stage replay winning (small role B-4) is established while staying in CZ2 during ART, the number of ART or ART games may be drawn by lottery, and when winning, the ART stock or the number of ART games may be added. In addition, the expectation degree to win becomes higher every time the middle stage replay winning is established while staying in CZ2 during ART.

  The bonus state will be described below. The bonus state (special game state) includes an S-BIG state (first bonus BN1 state), an N-BIG state (second bonus BN2 state), and a chance zone 3 (CZ3) (third bonus BN3 state).

  When the S-BIG symbol combination mode (“symbol A, symbol A, symbol A”, etc.) is established on the middle symbol formation line, the S-BIG state is determined as another gaming state (non-ART state, ART). State). After completion of the S-BIG state, the state shifts to the ART state. In the S-BIG state, 160 medals increase (160 net increase). When entering the S-BIG state, the ART stock may be added by the number of sets of 5 to 10 (for example, the number of sets determined by lottery).

  When the N-BIG symbol combination mode (“symbol B, symbol B, symbol A”, etc.) is established on the middle symbol formation line, the N-BIG state indicates another gaming state (non-ART state, ART State). After the end of the N-BIG state, the state shifts to the ART state. In the N-BIG state, the number of medals increases by 50 (net increase of 50). At the time of entering the S-BIG state, ART stock is added by the number of sets of 1 to 2 (for example, the number of sets determined by lottery).

  CZ3 (BN3) is a game state (non-ART state) when the REG symbol combination mode (“white 7, white 7, white 7” (white 7 alignment)) is established on the middle symbol formation line. , ART state, etc.). After CZ3 is completed, the state shifts to the ART state in principle. As an exception, when transitioning to CZ3 during the ART state, the yellow 7 prize (that is, the small role A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4) has been established three times or more during the ART state. If it does, it will transfer to a non-ART state.

  When shifting from the normal gaming state to CZ3, if two or more whites 7 are established on the middle symbol formation line (white 7 template) in CZ3, the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted. When shifting from the ART state to CZ3, when two or more whites 7 are established on the middle symbol formation line (white 7 template) in CZ3, the number of ART games is added and a lottery is performed. Even when transitioning from CZ1, 2, 4 to CZ3, if two or more whites 7 are established on the middle symbol formation line in CZ3 (white 7 template), the number of ART games is added and a lottery is performed.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a game control process according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The game control process is executed by the game control device 50 (control means). FIG. 91 is the same as FIG. 16 of the first embodiment, but differs from FIG. 16 in that the freeze effect setting process (step A1009) is omitted.

  Also in the second embodiment, the game control device 50 executes the same timer interrupt process as in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment and the same internal lottery process as in FIG. 18 of the first embodiment.

[Winning determination process]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a winning determination process according to the second embodiment. The winning determination process is executed in step A1012 of the game control process shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 92, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the winning determination process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the effective line is a middle symbol formation line as shown in FIG. 88, but the number of effective lines is 1 as in the first embodiment. The winning symbol is a symbol combination mode corresponding to any winning combination shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 92, unlike in FIG. 20, the processes of steps A1311 and A1312 are omitted. Further, step A1318 is provided instead of step A1314-A1316. When the replay winning is established (the result of step A1307 is “Y”), the game control device 50 executes a replay information setting process for setting replay information as a process at the time of the replay winning (step A1318). ).

[Replay information setting process]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of replay information setting processing (step A1318 in FIG. 92) according to the second embodiment.

  The game control device 50 first determines whether or not it is currently in the ART state or the big bonus state (S-BIG state, N-BIG state) (step A2001). When in the ART state or the big bonus state (the result of step A2001 is “Y”), the replay winning combination (small role B) adds the ART stock to the ART additional replay (that is, the small role B-3, B-4, B-7, B-8, etc.) (step A2002). If it is not ART addition replay (the result of step A2002 is “N”), the current process is terminated.

  When the replay winning combination (small role B) is ART addition replay (the result of step A2002 is “Y”), setting is made to increase the number of ART stock by adding ART stock (step A2003). When the replay winning combination (small role B) is not an ART addition replay (the result of step A2002 is “N”), the current process is terminated.

  When the player is not in the ART state or the big bonus state (the result of step A2001 is “N”), the replay winning combination (small role B) enters the RT state into the RT rush replay (that is, small role B-3, B- 4, B-5, B-7, B-8, etc.) (step A2004). The RT state here excludes the ART state, and includes non-ART CZs 1, 2, 4 and the preparation RT state. When the replay winning combination (small role B) is the RT entry replay (the result of step A2004 is “Y”), the setting for entering the RT state is made (step A2005), and then the current process is terminated. When the replay winning combination (small role B) is not RT entry replay (the result of step A2004 is “N”), the current process is terminated.

[Game state update processing]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of gaming state update processing according to the second embodiment. The game state update process is executed in step A1014 of the game control process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 50 first determines whether or not any bonus state is currently in effect (step A2101). That is, it is determined whether or not the S-BIG state, the N-BIG state, or the chance zone 3 (CZ3, BN3). If any bonus state is in effect (the result of step A2101 is “Y”), a bonus end determination process is executed to determine whether or not to end the bonus (steps A2102 and A2103). When the number of medals paid out exceeds the upper limit value, it is determined that the bonus is to be ended. When the bonus is not ended (the result of step A2103 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A2113, and when the bonus is ended (the result of step A2103 is “Y”), the bonus described later for monitoring the bonus end An end monitoring process (FIG. 95) is executed (step A2104).

  When it is not in the bonus state (the result of step A2101 is “N”), the game control device 50 acquires the winning determination result information stored in step A1309 (step A2105), and determines whether or not the bonus winning is achieved. (Step A2106). When a bonus winning is established (the result of step A2106 is “Y”), a special gaming state corresponding to the bonus winning combination (S-BIG state, N-BIG state, or chance zone 3 (CZ3, BN3)) Is set (step A2107), information regarding the bonus winning flag is cleared (step A2108), and the process proceeds to step A2113.

  When the bonus winning is not established (the result of Step A2106 is “N”), the game control apparatus 50 determines whether or not the normal gaming state is currently in progress (Step A2109). If it is in the normal gaming state (the result of step A2109 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2113.

  When it is not in the normal gaming state (the result of Step A2109 is “N”), the game control device 50 determines whether or not it is currently in RT (Step A2110). Here, if it is in the ART state, in the preparation RT state, in CZ1, 2, 4 or the like, it is determined that the RT is in progress. When RT is in progress (the result of step A2110 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the RT termination condition is satisfied (step A2111). If the RT termination condition is satisfied (the result of step A2111 is “Y”), the RT termination is set (step A2112), and the process proceeds to step A2113. On the other hand, if the RT is not in progress (the result of step A2110 is “N”) or if the RT termination condition is not satisfied (the result of step A2111 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2113.

  In step A2113, the game control device 50 determines whether or not there is a change in the gaming state (step A2113). If there is no change in the gaming state (the result of step A2113 is “N”), the current process is terminated. When there is a change in the game state (the result of step A2113 is “Y”), a game state command corresponding to the game state of the change destination is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step A2114), and then the current process is terminated. .

  With regard to step A2114, for example, when the bonus state is ended in step A2103, a game state command (such as sending an ART command set in the bonus end monitoring process of A2104) corresponding to the changed ART state or the normal gaming state is produced. It transmits to the control apparatus 70. Further, for example, when the special gaming state (S-BIG state, N-BIG state, or chance zone 3 (CZ3, BN3)) corresponding to the bonus winning combination is set in step A2107, The game state or ART state is changed to a special game state (bonus state), and a game state command corresponding to the changed special game state is transmitted to the effect control device 70. Further, for example, when the end of RT is set in step A2112, a game state command corresponding to the normal game state to be changed is transmitted to the effect control device 70.

[Bonus end monitoring process]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of bonus end monitoring processing according to the second embodiment. The bonus end monitoring process is executed in step A2104 of the gaming state update process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 50 first makes a branching determination according to the bonus state to be ended (step A2201). When the bonus state to be ended is the S-BIG state, it is determined whether or not the net increase in medals in the bonus state is 160 or more (step A2202). If the net increase is not 160 or more (the result of step A2202 is “N”), the current process is terminated, and the bonus end monitoring process is repeated until the net increase is 160 or more. If the net increase is 160 sheets or more (the result of step A2202 is “Y”), the RT state is set to shift to the ART state (step A2203). Here, the setting of the RT state includes the setting of the preparation RT state and the setting of the RT state in the ART. Next, a setting for transmitting an ART command to the effect control device 70 is performed (step A2204), and the current process is terminated.

  When the bonus state to be ended is the N-BIG state, the game control device 50 determines whether or not the net increase in medals in the bonus state is 50 or more (step A2205). When the net increase in medals in the bonus state is not 50 or more (the result of Step A2205 is “N”), the current process is terminated and the bonus end monitoring process is repeated until the net increase is 50 or more. When the net increase in medals in the bonus state is 50 or more (the result of step A2205 is “Y”), the RT state is set (step A2206), and the setting is made to send the ART command to the effect control device 70 (step A2206). Step A2207).

  When the bonus state to be ended is chance zone 3 (CZ3, BN3), “Yellow 7” winning (ie, small role A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4) is 3 in the ART state. It is determined whether or not it has been established more than once (step A2208). If the “Yellow 7” win (ie, small roles A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4) is less than three times during the ART state (the result of step A2208 is “N”), the bonus state It is determined whether or not the net increase in medals is 6 or more (step A2209). When the net increase in medals in the bonus state is 6 or more (the result of step A2209 is “Y”), the RT state is set (step A2210), and the setting is made to transmit the ART command to the effect control device 70 (step A2210). Step A2211).

  On the other hand, when “Yellow 7” winning (that is, small role A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4) is established three times or more in the ART state (the result of step A2208 is “Y”). The game control device 50 sets the normal game state flag (step A2212), and ends the current process. If the net increase in medals in the bonus state is not 6 or more (the result of step A2209 is “N”), the current process is terminated.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect control process according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the effect control process, when the power of the effect control device 70 is turned on when the slot machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 70a reads out and executes the control program of the effect control process stored in the ROM 70b. Be started.

  When the effect control process is started, the effect control device 70 first initializes the register in the CPU 70a of the effect control device 70, initializes the game data stored in the RAM 70c, and receives the game control device 50 from the game control device 50. A power-on process for performing a power-on / recovery notification process based on the power-on / recovery command is executed (step B3001). Next, a history information browsing process for browsing the game result history information is executed (step B3002). Then, when the game has not been executed for a predetermined time, a customer waiting effect process for displaying a customer waiting demo image or the like on the image display device (main display) 3 such as a liquid crystal display panel is executed (step B3003). Here, when the image display device 3 is not provided, the G counter value display device 623 may display for waiting for the customer.

  Next, the effect control device 70 executes a bet amount notification process for notifying the bet amount (sound, display, light emission) based on the bet number command transmitted every time the bet number is updated (step B3004). Then, a settlement notification process for notifying that settlement has been performed based on the settlement command is executed (step B3005). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is started (step B3006). When a lottery result command is received from the game control device 50, it is determined that the game has started. If the game has not started (the result of step B3006 is “N”), the current process is terminated.

  When the game is started (the result of step B3006 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 executes a game effect determining process for determining the effect of the game according to the gaming state or the like (step B3007). A game progress control process for advancing the effect is executed (step B3008). The effects of the game include the effects of the movable accessory 653 in addition to the effects displayed on the image display device 3, the G counter value display 623, and the like. Then, a game end process (FIG. 97), which is a process at the end of the game, is executed (step B3009), and a GBS determination process for determining a counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is executed (step B3010).

  Next, when the game result includes payout, the effect control device 70 executes payout notification setting processing for notifying payout based on a payout command transmitted for each payout (step B3011). An effect mode update process for changing the effect mode is executed (step B3012). And the production | presentation control apparatus 70 performs the log | history information storage process which memorize | stores a game result as log | history information (step B3013), and complete | finishes this process after that.

  The effect control device 70 uses commands such as a power-on / recovery command, a bet number command, a settlement command, a lottery result command, a payout command, a game state command (including an ART command) transmitted from the game control device 50 as commands. Received by reception processing (interrupt processing).

[Game end processing]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of game end processing according to the second embodiment. The game end process is executed in step B3009 of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the bonus (BN) state started during the normal gaming state is in progress (step B3101). When the bonus (BN) state started during the normal gaming state is in progress (the result of step B3101 is “Y”), the BN in-process that is the process in the bonus (BN) state is executed (step B3102). Subsequently, in the case of CZ3, a GBS subtraction process for subtracting the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is executed every time two or more whites 7 are established on the middle symbol formation line (white 7 template). (Step B3103), the current process is terminated.

  In the case where the effect control device 70 is not in the bonus (BN) state started during the normal gaming state (the result of step B3101 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the bonus (BN) state started during the ART state. Determination is made (step B3104). If the bonus (BN) state started during ART is in progress (the result of step B3104 is “Y”), the BN in-process, which is the process in the bonus (BN) state, is executed (step B3105). Subsequently, when an ART addition lottery process is performed to win, ART stock is added (added) and stored (step B3106), and the current process ends.

  When the bonus (BN) started during the ART is not in progress (the result of Step B3104 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the ART is in the ART (Step B3107). If it is in the ART state (the result of step B3107 is “Y”), the ART-in-process (FIG. 98) that is the process in the ART state is executed (step B3108).

  When not in the ART state (the result of Step B3107 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not it is in the preparation RT state (Step B3109). If it is in the preparation RT state (the result of step B3109 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not an ART entry replay winning combination (small combination B-3) has been established (step B3110). When the ART entry replay winning combination (small combination B-3) is not established (the result of step B3110 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B3112. When the ART rush replay winning combination (small role B-3) is established (the result of step B3110 is “Y”), an ART rush process for rushing into the ART state is executed (step B3111), and the process of step B3112 Migrate to

  In step B3112, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the current zone is CZ4 (chance zone 4). If it is CZ4 (the result of step B3112 is “Y”), the CZ4 process that is the process performed in CZ4 is executed (step B3113), and the current process is terminated. In the case of not being in the ART state or the bonus (BN) state, if a rare small combination with a sign is established or there is CZ4 stock, it has entered CZ4.

  If it is not CZ4 (the result of step B3112 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether it is currently CZ2 (step B3114). If it is CZ2 (the result of step B3114 is “Y”), the CZ2 process that is the process in CZ2 is executed (step B3115), and the current process is terminated.

  If it is not CZ2 (the result of step B3114 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not it is currently CZ1 (step B3116). If it is CZ1 (the result of step B3116 is “Y”), the CZ1 process that is the process in CZ1 is executed (step B3117), and the current process is terminated.

  When it is not CZ1 (the result of Step B3116 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a rare small combination without a sign has been established (Step B3118). When a rare small combination with no sign is established (the result of step B3118 is “Y”), the CZ4 stock is increased by 1 (step B3119), and the current process is terminated. When a rare small combination without a sign is not established (step B3118), the current process is terminated.

[Processing during ART]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ART processing in the second embodiment. The ART process is executed in step B3108 of the game end process shown in FIG.

  The effect control apparatus 70 executes ART process 1 (FIG. 99) (step B3201), and then executes ART process 2 (B3202) (FIG. 100).

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the ART processing 1 in the second embodiment. The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not it is currently in the G-RUSH state (main ART state) (step B3301). When it is in the G-RUSH state (the result of Step B3301 is “Y”), the G-RUSH process that is the process performed in the G-RUSH state is executed (Step B3302), and the current process is terminated. In the preparation RT state, when the small combination B-3 (ART entry replay winning combination, Lip 3) is established, the state shifts to the G-RUSH state (main ART state). In addition, after 10 games of CZ1 during ART or 3 games of CZ2 during ART are completed, the state shifts to the G-RUSH state (main ART state).

  When it is not in the G-RUSH state (the result of step B3301 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not it is currently CZ2 during ART (CZ2 in the ART state) (step B3303). If it is CZ2 during ART (the result of step B3303 is “Y”), the CZ2 process during ART which is the process performed by CZ2 during ART is executed (step B3304), and the current process is terminated.

  When it is not CZ2 during ART (the result of step B3303 is “N”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not it is currently CZ1 during ART (CZ1 in the ART state) (step B3305). If it is CZ1 during ART (the result of step B3305 is “Y”), CZ1 processing that is processing performed by CZ1 during ART is executed (step B3306), and the current processing is terminated. If it is not CZ1 during ART (the result of step B3305 is “N”), the current process is terminated.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ART processing 2 in the second embodiment. The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not it is in the ART state (step B3401). When not in the ART state (the result of step B3401 is “N”), execution of the determined game effect is started (step B3402), and the process proceeds to step B3403. If it is in the ART state (the result of step B3401 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B3403.

  In step B3403, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the winning combination is won (step B3403). The assist target combination is a combination (small combination, etc.) that is established when the player operates the reel stop button 24 in accordance with the operation sequence (pushing sequence) notified to the operation sequence display device 620. Is established). When an assist target combination is won (the result of step B3403 is “Y”), an operation assist display that is advantageous to the player, that is, an operation order display to be displayed (notified) on the operation order display device 620 is set ( Step B3404) and the process proceeds to Step B3405. If the winning combination is not won (the result of step B3403 is “N”), the process directly proceeds to step B3405.

  In step B3405, the effect control device 70 determines whether or not a reel stop command indicating that the reel has stopped is received (step B3405). When the reel stop command has not been received (the result of step B3405 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B3410. When the reel stop command is received (the result of step B3405 is “Y”), the reel stop information is updated (step B3406).

  Next, the effect control device 70 determines whether there is an assist violation (step B3407). Here, when the operation assist display (that is, the display of the operation order displayed on the operation order display device 620) does not match the actual operation order by the player, it is determined that there is an assist violation. When there is an assist violation (the result of step B3407 is “Y”), output of a warning sound from the speaker 4 and display of a warning image on the image display device 3 are set (step B3408), and the process proceeds to step B3410. Instead of the image display device 3, warning display on the operation order display device 620 or the like may be set. When there is no assist violation (the result of step B3407 is “N”), the effect (game effect, AT image) being executed is updated based on the reel stop information (step B3409), and the process proceeds to step B3410.

  In step B3410, the effect control device 70 determines whether a game result command has been received (step B3410). If no game result command has been received (the result of step B3410 is “N”), the process returns to step B3405. When a game result command is received (the result of step B3410 is “Y”), the ART game number counter that counts the number of remaining games (ART game number) in one ART state is decremented by 1 and updated (ART Game number counter-1) (step B3411), the current process is terminated.

  The effect control device 70 functions as an ART game number counter (ART game number counting unit) by using, for example, a variable stored in the RAM 70c as a counter. The ART remaining game number display unit 635 displays the value of the ART game number counter.

[GBS judgment processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of GBS determination processing according to the second embodiment. The GBS determination process is executed in step B3010 of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  The effect control device 70 first executes GBS subtraction processing for subtracting the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter (step B3501). Then, it is determined whether GBS is 0 or less (that is, a predetermined value or less) (step B3502). If GBS is not 0 or less (the result of step B3502 is “N”), the current process is terminated. When GBS is 0 or less (the result of step B3502 is “Y”), it is determined whether GBS is 0 (step B3503).

  When the GBS is 0 (the result of step B3503 is “Y”), the production control device 70 adds (adds), for example, 5 sets of the ART stock number as a privilege, and is more advantageous than the case where the GBS does not become 0. A specific game state (ART state) can be generated (step B3504). Thereby, since the player tries to match GBS with 0, the interest of the game is enhanced. In step B3504, the number of ART games may be added instead of adding the ART stock number. Then, a G-RUSH state flag is set to enable transition to the G-RUSH state (main ART state) (step B3505). If GBS is 0 and the state shifts to the ART state (the result of step B3503 is “Y”), when returning to the normal gaming state after the end of the ART state, the GBS count starts from the initial value selected by lottery or the like. May be.

  When the GBS is not 0 (the result of step B3503 is “N”), the effect control device 70 stores the negative value of GBS in a memory (such as the RAM 70c) although GBS is a negative value (step B3506). When returning to the normal gaming state after the end of the ART state, the GBS count is started with a value (for example, 990) obtained by subtracting the stored negative value (for example, −9) from the maximum value of the GBS (for example, 999) as an initial value. May be. Then, a G-RUSH state flag is set to enable transition to the G-RUSH state (main ART state) (step B3507).

  FIG. 102A and FIG. 102B are flowcharts showing the procedure of GBS subtraction processing (step B3501) of the second embodiment. FIG. 102B particularly shows the procedure of the GBS subtraction process in CZ4 in the GBS subtraction process.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not it is currently in CZ4 (step B3601). If not in CZ4 (the result of step B3601 is “N”), the GBS normal subtraction process is executed (step B3602). If it is currently in the normal gaming state, CZ1, CZ2, bonus state, ART state, or ready RT state, it can be determined that CZ4 is not in progress. In the GBS normal subtraction process, the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is basically subtracted by 1 which is a normal subtraction value (normal decrease amount) every time the variable display game (variable display game) is executed. Exceptionally, the subtraction value (subtraction amount) larger than 1 may be subtracted or not subtracted under a predetermined condition. The normal subtraction value may be other than 1. If it is during CZ4 (the result of step B3601 is “Y”), it is determined whether the end condition of CZ4 is satisfied (step B3603). The termination condition for CZ4 is, for example, that 10 games (10G) are executed during CZ4.

  If the termination condition for CZ4 is not satisfied (the result of step B3603 is “N”), the GBS subtraction process in CZ4 (FIG. 102B) is executed. In the GBS subtraction process in CZ4, every time a variable display game (variable display game) is executed, the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is a subtraction value (large subtraction value, large decrease) larger than the normal subtraction value (ie, 1). Amount) can be subtracted.

  When the termination condition for CZ4 is satisfied (the result of Step B3603 is “Y”), the effect control device 70 determines whether or not the number of CZ4 stocks is greater than 0 (Step B3604). When the number of CZ4 stocks is 0 or less (the result of step B3604 is “N”), the normal game state flag is set (step B3605), and the current process is terminated. If the CZ4 stock number is greater than 0 (the result of step B3604 is “Y”), CZ4 is set (step B3606), the CZ4 stock number is subtracted by 1 (step B3607), and the current process is terminated.

  In the GBS subtraction process (FIG. 102B) in CZ4, the effect control device 70 performs a branch process (step B3608), a GBS large subtraction process (step B3609), a continuous hit chance process (step B3610), and a game chance process (step B3611) is selected and executed. For example, in the branch process (step B3608), the branch destination may be selected according to the lottery result of the internal lottery process, or the branch destination may be selected by performing a lottery different from the internal lottery. In addition, when performing a freeze effect as in the first embodiment, the consecutive hit chance process (step B3610) or the game chance process (step B3611) may be selected.

  In the GBS large subtraction process (step B3609), the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter can be subtracted by a predetermined subtraction value (fixed value) larger than the normal subtraction value (ie, 1). In the repeated hitting process (step B3610), the game counter is set to a subtraction value corresponding to the number of times that the player repeatedly hits (repeated operation) the operation units such as the effect button 10 and the max bet button 17 (the number of repeated hits and the number of operations). The counter value (GBS) can be subtracted larger than the normal subtraction value (ie, 1). In the game chance process (step B3611), the mini-game is performed on the image display device 3 or the like, and the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is set to the normal subtraction value (that is, 1) by the subtraction value corresponding to the game result of the minigame. ) Greater subtraction. The player may play a mini game by operating operation units such as the effect button 10, the max bet button 17, the start lever 21, and a touch panel (not shown).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the consecutive hitting chance process (step B3610) of the second embodiment. The repeated hitting chance process may be executed when performing a freeze effect as in the first embodiment. During freeze production, the player has time to repeatedly hit (operate) the operation unit. In addition, during the freeze effect, the image display device 3 or the like may perform a display that prompts the player to make repeated hits (operations).

  The effect control device 70 first determines the number of consecutive hits, which is the number of times the player repeatedly hits the operation unit such as the effect button 10 and the max bet button 17 (step B3701). When the number of consecutive hits is 4 or less, the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted by the subtraction value (number of consecutive hits × 1) of the number of consecutive hits (step B3702). When the number of consecutive hits is 5 times or more, the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted by a subtraction value (number of consecutive hits × 10) 10 times the number of consecutive hits (step B3703).

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game chance process (step B3611) according to the second embodiment. The game chance process may be executed when there is a freeze effect, similar to the consecutive hit chance process.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the game result of a predetermined mini-game played on the image display device 3 or the like is a game clear (game success or victory) (step B3801). If the game result is not a game clear (the result of step B3801 is “N”), the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted by the subtraction value of (predetermined number × 1) (step B3802). When the game result is game clear (the result of step B3801 is “Y”), the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted by the subtraction value of (predetermined number × 10) (step B3803).

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of GBS maintenance processing according to the second embodiment. The GBS maintenance process is executed as part of the BN process (B3102 in FIG. 97), which is a process in the bonus (BN) state.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus state is started (step B4001). When the bonus state is started (the result of step B4001 is “Y”), the counter value (GBS) at the start is stored in the memory (RAM 70c) (step B4002), and the process proceeds to step B4003. . If it is not the time when the bonus start is started (the result of step B4001 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B4003.

  In step B4003, the effect control device 70 determines whether it is time to end the bonus state. When it is time to end the bonus state (the result of step B4003 is “Y”), the stored counter value (GBS) at the start of the bonus state is displayed on the G counter value display device 623 (step B4004). ), And terminates the current process. If it is not time to end the bonus state (the result of step B4003 is “N”), the current process is terminated. Note that the stored counter value (GBS) at the start of the bonus state is displayed on the G counter value display device 623 not at the end of the bonus state but at the end of the ART state after the bonus state. But you can.

  Even during the bonus state, the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is actually subtracted by the GBS normal subtraction process (B3602). However, by the GBS maintenance process, the counter value (GBS) is not displayed on the G counter value display device 623 during the bonus state, and the counter value (GBS) at the start of the bonus state is displayed at the end of the bonus state. indicate. After the bonus state ends, the temporary counter value may be subtracted so that the numerical value (temporary counter value) displayed on the G counter value display device 623 matches the actual counter value (GBS).

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of GBS extinguishing processing according to the second embodiment. The GBS extinguishing process may be executed between steps B3501 and B3502, for example, as part of the GBS determination process (FIG. 101). The GBS turn-off process is a process for turning off the counter value (GBS) by turning off the display unit of the G counter value display device 623.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether GBS is 20 or less (step B4101). When GBS is larger than 20 (the result of step B4101 is “N”), the counter value (GBS) of the G counter value display device 623 is turned off at a predetermined rate (probability) (step B4102). On the other hand, when GBS is 20 or less (the result of step B4101 is “Y”), the counter value (GBS) of the G counter value display device 623 is always turned off (step B4103). By the process of step B4102, even if the counter value (GBS) is not close to a predetermined value (that is, 0), the counter value (GBS) is sometimes turned off, and the player can have a sense of expectation.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of GBS value subtraction processing executed as part of the GBS normal subtraction processing (B3602 in FIG. 102A) of the second embodiment. In the GBS value subtraction process, when the player presses the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c in a predetermined operation order (for example, the notified operation order), 1 or a predetermined value is selected by lottery as a subtraction value. Then, the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted. The predetermined value is the current counter value (GBS), and it becomes easy to obtain a privilege (addition of ART stock number, etc.) in step B3504 by matching the counter value (GBS) to 0 with a predetermined probability.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c are pressed in the notified operation order (step B4301). The notification of the operation order may be performed by the operation order display device 620 or the left-press notification light emitting unit 627. When the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c are not pressed in the notified operation order (the result of step B4301 is “N”), the current process is terminated and the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is set. Do not subtract.

  When the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c are pushed in the notified operation order (the result of step B4301 is “Y”), 1 or a predetermined value is selected by lottery as a subtraction value, and the number of games counter The counter value (GBS) is subtracted. As the subtraction value, for example, 1 is selected with a probability of 80%, and a predetermined value (current counter value) is selected with a probability of 20%. The selection probability of the predetermined value may be displayed on the image display device 3.

  The GBS value subtraction process may be executed only under a predetermined condition (for example, when GBS ≦ 50 (specific value)). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, only 1 is used as the subtraction value. It's okay. In addition, in step B4301, the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c are pressed in a predetermined order as the predetermined operation order ("left", "middle", and "right" operation order). It may be determined whether or not it has been pressed.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of GBS mode transition processing executed as part of the GBS normal subtraction processing (B3602 in FIG. 102A) according to the second embodiment. In the GBS mode transition process, when the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter approaches 0, it is difficult to set a large subtraction zone and make the counter value (GBS) coincide with 0.

  The effect control device 70 first determines whether or not the counter value (GBS) is 50 (specific value) or less (GBS ≦ 50) (step B4401). That is, it is determined whether or not the counter value (GBS) has entered a predetermined range (GBS ≦ 50) around a predetermined value (that is, 0). When the counter value (GBS) is larger than 50 (the result of Step B4401 is “N”), the subtraction value is set to 1 and the counter value (GBS) is subtracted (Step B4402). When the counter value (GBS) is 50 or less (the result of Step B4401 is “Y”), a large subtraction zone is set (Step B4403). In the large subtraction zone, 1 or a predetermined large value (for example, 5) is selected by lottery as a subtraction value, and the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted. Since a large value is selected by lottery, it is difficult to make the counter value (GBS) equal to zero.

  It should be noted that the GBS mode transition process of FIG. 108 and the GBS value subtraction process of FIG. 107 may be combined by executing the GBS value subtraction process of FIG. 107 in the large subtraction zone. In this case, the counter value (GBS) is set when the player presses the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c in a predetermined operation order under a predetermined condition (GBS ≦ 50 (specific value)). It becomes easy to match zero.

  FIG. 109 shows a display mode of the G counter value display device 623 when the image display device 3 is not provided and a freeze effect is performed as a modification. When performing a freeze effect, FIG. 91 is the same as FIG. 16 of the first embodiment, and a freeze effect setting process (step A1009) is added. During the freeze effect, “−F−” is displayed on the G counter value display device 623.

  Further, as a modification of the second embodiment, the effect control device 70 does not subtract the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter in accordance with the execution of the variable display game (variable display game), but adds It is good also as composition to do. That is, the production control device 70 adds the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter normally by 1 (normal addition value, normal increase amount) each time a variable display game (variable display game) is executed. In a specific chance zone or the like, the counter value (GBS) may be added by an addition value (a large addition value or a large increase amount) larger than 1. Then, when the counter value (GBS) increases to a value equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 800), the effect control device 70 changes from a non-ART state to an ART state that is a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which can be migrated.

  In this modification example, in FIG. 101, in B3502, it is determined whether GBS is 800 or more (that is, a predetermined value or more), in B3503, it is determined whether GBS is 800, and in B3506, The excess exceeding the GBS 800 is stored in a memory (such as the RAM 70c). When returning to the normal gaming state after the end of the ART state, the GBS count is started with a value (for example, 9) obtained by adding an amount of excess (for example, +9) stored from the minimum value of the GBS (for example, 0) as an initial value. Also good. Further, in each step of performing subtraction in FIGS. 102 to 104, 107, and 108, addition is performed instead of subtraction.

  Furthermore, as a modification of the second embodiment, the effect control device 70 may be configured to perform both subtraction and addition of the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter.

  Below, the effect of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. According to the second embodiment, the slot machine (game machine) performs a variable display game (variable display game) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner, and when the stop result of the variable display game corresponds to a prize, the player Profit (medal grant, replay, advantageous game state, etc.) The counter changing means (for example, the effect control device 70) can change the counter value (GBS) in accordance with the execution of the change display game. The specific gaming state generating means (for example, the effect control device 70), when the counter value decreases to a value equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, the first predetermined value “0”), or the counter value increases. When the value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the second predetermined value “800”) or more, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player can be generated. In addition to the ART state, the specific game state may be a chance zone, a high probability state, an AT state, or an RT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, such as constantly notifying the counter value or changing the counter value variously according to the execution of the variable display game. In addition, when the counter value (GBS) decreases (counts down), the player can realize that he or she is approaching the occurrence of an advantageous specific gaming state, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the counter variation means (for example, the effect control device 70) can add or subtract one count value from one variation display game, and further count the counter value once. It is possible to add or subtract with a value larger than 1 for the variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation of the counter value becomes larger or smaller, the player's expectation increases or decreases, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the counter notification device (for example, the G counter value display device 623) can notify the counter value and is provided at a deep position. Therefore, since it is difficult for a person other than the player who is playing the game to see the counter notification device, he or she looks around a slot machine (game machine) whose counter value is close to a predetermined value and searches for such a slot machine (game machine). Annoying acts (so-called hyena acts) such as

  According to the second embodiment, the specific game state generating means (for example, the effect control device 70) matches the counter value with the predetermined value when the counter value matches the predetermined value in accordance with the execution of the variable display game. It is possible to generate a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where there is not (GBS determination processing in FIG. 101). Therefore, the player enjoys making the counter value coincide with the predetermined value, and can improve the interest of the game.

  According to the second embodiment, the slot machine (game machine) includes a plurality of operation units (for example, reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c) that can be operated by the player. The counter changing means can increase / decrease the counter value by an increase / decrease amount other than 1 for one variation display game. The counter changing means does not increase or decrease the counter value when the plurality of operation units are not operated in a predetermined operation order during the change display game (GBS value subtraction process in FIG. 107). The predetermined operation order is a notified operation order or a predetermined operation order. Therefore, when the counter value is close to the predetermined value, the player may adjust the increase / decrease value by aiming at the predetermined value just by not operating the plurality of operation units in the predetermined operation order. it can. Therefore, there is room for technical intervention, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  According to the second embodiment, the counter changing means can increase or decrease the counter value other than 1 for one change display game when the counter value enters a predetermined range around the predetermined value (FIG. 108). GBS mode transition process). Therefore, a game in which the counter value is stopped at a predetermined value can be enjoyed, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(Third embodiment)
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 118. The third embodiment relates to a concealing member that conceals the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter. The configuration not particularly described below may be the same as that of the second embodiment.

  110A to 110D are partial schematic front views showing a slot machine 610 (game machine) in which left and right bowl-shaped concealing members 653a and 653b are used as the movable accessory 653 (FIG. 85). An image display device (main display device) 3 such as a liquid crystal display panel is accommodated in a rectangular concave chamber 660 formed on the front side of the slot machine 610 and is located at the bottom 661 of the concave chamber 660 (that is, a recessed position). Arranged (similar to the first embodiment). An effect space R is provided inside the rectangular concave chamber 660. In the third embodiment, the image display device 3 includes a counter value display unit 3a that displays a counter value (GBS) of a game number counter on a screen (here, upper left), and functions as a counter value display device. The effect control device 70 controls the counter value display unit 3a to display the counter value (GBS) on the counter value display unit 3a.

  The concealing members 653a and 653b (movable accessory 653) move to a position in front of the counter value display unit 3a (the concealment position) of the image display device 3, thereby causing the counter value display unit 3a (and thus the displayed counter value ( It is a concealing movable member that conceals and covers GBS)), and functions as a concealing means. The concealing members 653a and 653b are translucent or opaque so that the objects behind are not visible. The concealing members 653a and 653b linearly move in parallel with the screen of the image display device 3 through the front of the image display device 3. Note that the concealing means of the slot machine 610 may include a drive mechanism (comprising a motor, gears, or the like) for moving the concealing members 653a and 653b in response to a command from the effect control device 70.

  The concealing members 653a and 653b are arranged at an initial position (normal position) around the concave chamber 660 in which the image display device 3 (game number counter value display device) is accommodated when the counter value display unit 3a is not concealed. . In FIG. 110, when the counter value display unit 3a is concealed, the left and right bowl-shaped concealing members 653a and 653b respectively back the back side (standby space) of the left side wall 660a and the back side (standby space) of the right side wall 660b. ) To the center of the production space R.

  In FIG. 110A, the counter value (GBS) is displayed as “999” on the counter value display section 3a of the image display device 3. Here, the effect control device 70 causes the image display device 3 to display the counter value “999”.

  Next, in FIG. 110 (B), the left and right bowl-shaped concealing members 653a and 653b move toward the center of the effect space portion R and close, and the counter value display portion 3a (and hence the counter) of the image display device 3 is closed. Value (GBS)). In FIG. 110 (B), in particular, the left concealing member 653a conceals. Here, the effect control device 70 moves the left and right concealing members 653a and 653b when subtracting the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter in the GBS subtraction process (FIGS. 102A and 102B) of the second embodiment. Control to close.

  Next, in FIG. 110C, the left and right bowl-shaped concealing members 653a and 653b are opened, and the image display apparatus 3 subtracts the counter value (GBS in this example) when the counter value (GBS) is subtracted. Is displayed. Here, the effect control device 70 controls the concealing members 653a and 653b to move to the standby space (initial position, normal position) to open them, and causes the image display device 3 to display the subtraction value.

  Next, in FIG. 110 (D), a sound effect is generated from the speaker 4, and the counter value (GBS) after subtraction is displayed as “799” on the counter value display unit 3a of the image display device 3. Here, the effect control device 70 causes the speaker 4 to generate a sound effect and causes the image display device 3 to obtain the counter value “799” after subtracting the subtraction value “200” from the counter value “999” before subtraction. Display.

  The effect control device 70 conceals the concealment members 653a and 653b only when the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter enters a predetermined range (for example, GBS ≦ 50) around a predetermined value (for example, 0). You may make it movable to a position (position where the counter value is hidden). For example, the concealing members 653a and 653b may be moved when performing subtraction in the large subtraction zone (B4303) when the result of step B4401 in FIG. 108 is “Y”.

  Further, the effect control device 70 may enable the concealment members 653a and 653b to move to the concealment position according to the result of a predetermined game as the effect. For example, when the game of step B3801 in FIG. 104 fails (the result of step B3801 is “N”), the concealing members 653a and 653b may be movable during subtraction (step B3802).

  111A to 111D show a case where the left and right concealing members 653a and 653b are movable shutter accessories. FIG. 111A is a schematic front view showing the slot machine 610. FIG. 111 (B) is a diagram showing a movable shutter accessory. FIG. 111C shows a state where the movable shutter accessory is opened. In FIG. 111C, the movable shutter accessory is closed, and the counter value “69” is hidden in the counter value display portion 3a.

  112 (A) and 112 (B) are schematic front views showing a slot machine 610 in which a concealing member 653c is used as the movable accessory 653 (FIG. 85). The concealing member 653c may be a lid-like member or a sub-display (small liquid crystal panel). The concealing member 653c also covers and conceals the counter value display unit 3a (and thus the displayed counter value (GBS)) by moving to a position (concealment position) in front of the counter value display unit 3a of the image display device 3. It is a movable member for concealment and functions as concealment means. The concealing member 653c is translucent or opaque and makes it impossible to visually recognize the object behind it. Further, the concealing member 653c moves linearly in parallel with the screen of the image display device 3 through the front of the image display device 3.

  In FIG. 112 (A), the concealment member 653c is provided around the concave chamber 660 (in this case, the upper portion) in which the image display device 3 (game number counter value display device) is accommodated when the counter value display unit 3a is not concealed. Arranged at the initial position. The initial position of the concealing member 653c may not be on the back side in the vertical direction of the upper wall portion 660c of the concave chamber 660, but may be in front of the concave chamber 660 (effect space portion R).

  In FIG. 112 (B), the concealment member 653c moves to the concealment position and covers the counter value display unit 3a (and thus the counter value (GBS)) of the image display device 3 to conceal it. Here, in response to the operation unit (operation means) being operated by the player, the effect control device 70 may control to move the concealing member 653c. The operation unit may be the effect button 10 or the max bet button 17 or the like. Further, the concealment member 653c may be configured to be manually moved by the player. The concealment position to which the concealment member 653c moves may be inside the effect space R (concave chamber 660) or outside the effect space R (concave chamber 660). The concealment member 653c returns from the concealment position to the initial position when not concealing.

  When the production control device 70 performs control to move the concealment member 653c, the concealing means of the slot machine 610 is provided with a drive mechanism (motor or motor) for moving the concealment member 653c according to a command from the production control device 70. May be included).

  FIG. 113 (A) is a partial view of FIG. 112 (B), and FIG. 113 (B) is a view in which the concealing member 653c is removed from FIG. 113 (A).

  In a state where the concealing member 653c moves and covers the counter value display portion 3a of the image display device 3 as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the screen of the image display device 3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 113 (B). The counter value is not displayed on the counter value display unit 3a by blackening the portion corresponding to the concealing member 653c (including the counter value display unit 3a), white coating, or displaying an image other than the counter value. It is good also as a structure. In this way, even if the counter value display unit 3a is looked into, the counter value cannot be viewed completely.

  In this case, the effect control device 70 detects that the concealing member 653c has moved to a position (a position in front of the image display device 3) that conceals the counter value display unit 3a, and detects the counter value display unit 3a. Turn off the display of the counter value. The detection means is a position detection sensor for detecting the position of the concealing member 653c, a means for detecting the operation amount of the drive mechanism (for example, the rotation amount of the motor), or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (A), the counter value displayed on the image display device 3 may be larger than the concealment member 653c before the concealment member 653c is moved, and the concealment member 653c may not conceal the counter value. In this case, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the effect control device 70 is displayed on the image display device 3 when the detection means detects that the concealing member 653c has moved to a position in front of the image display device 3. The counter value may be resized so as to be smaller than the concealing member 653c.

  FIG. 115 is a schematic sectional view in the horizontal plane of the slot machine 610 (for example, a cross section taken along line II in FIG. 112B). Here, in the case where an effect movable member (effect movable accessory) 663 is provided in front of the image display device 3, the position of the concealment member 653c in the horizontal plane is shown. The concealing member 653c is disposed in front of the effect movable member 663, and a transparent plate 665 is disposed between the concealment member 653c and the effect movable member 663 as a transparent member so as to block the concave chamber 660. . In FIG. 115, the concealing position of the concealing member 653c is inside the effect space R (concave chamber 660), but may be outside the effect space R (concave chamber 660).

  The image display device 3 and the effect movable member 663 cannot be touched by the transparent plate 665. However, the concealing member 653c is in front of the transparent plate 665 and can be touched by the player. For this reason, the player can manually operate and move the concealing member 653c.

  FIG. 116 is a partial schematic front view showing a slot machine 610 in which a concealing member 653d is used as the movable accessory 653. The concealing member 653c moves linearly substantially parallel to the screen of the image display device 3, but the concealing member 653d rotates to display an image from the initial position around the concave chamber 660 (here, the upper portion). It moves to the concealment position ahead of the counter value display part 3a of the device 3. The concealing member 653d may be moved manually, or may be moved under the control of the effect control device 70.

  117A and 117B are schematic front views showing a slot machine 610 in which a concealing member 653e is used as the movable accessory 653. FIG. The concealing member 653c moves without being deformed, but the concealing member 653e can be expanded and contracted by a curtain-like member, and by extending, an initial position around the concave chamber 660 (here, left) ( From FIG. 117 (A)), it moves to the concealment position (FIG. 117 (B)) ahead of the counter value display unit 3a of the image display device 3. The concealment member 653e may be manually expanded and contracted, or may be controlled to be expanded and contracted by the effect control device 70.

  118A and 118B are schematic partial front views showing the slot machine 610 in which the concealing member 670 is used. Unlike the above-described concealing member 653c, the concealing member 670 is not a movable member but is fixed, and is always positioned in front of the counter value display unit 3a of the image display device 3. The concealing member 670 can change its transparency as necessary, and changes from a transparent state (that is, a state in which the rear side is easily visible) to a light shielding state (that is, a state in which the rear side is difficult to visually recognize). The concealing member 670 conceals the counter value display unit 3a in a light-shielded state, and makes it difficult to visually recognize the displayed counter value (GBS).

  In FIG. 118A, the concealing member 670 is transparent. However, in FIG. 118 (B), the concealment member 670 is in a light-shielding state and conceals the counter value display portion 3a, making it difficult to visually recognize the counter value (GBS) from the front.

  FIG. 118C is a diagram showing details of the concealment member 670. Here, the concealing member 670 is a light guide plate that is normally transparent, and the light source 673 is disposed to face the end of the concealing member 670. The light source 673 is a full color LED or a single color LED. The concealing member 670 has a light scattering region formed on the back surface by concavo-convex processing or a printed film, and the light scattering region (light emitting region, light emitting pattern) forwards the light of the light source 673 entering from the end of the concealing member 670 to the front. Scattered to emit light. Thus, the concealment member 670 emits light according to the light from the light source 673, and makes it difficult to visually recognize the rear counter value (GBS) from the front. When the light source 673 emits light in the same color as the display of the counter value (GBS), the counter value (GBS) is further difficult to visually recognize from the front. The effect control device 70 can control the light emission of the light source 673.

  As another example, the concealment member 670 may be a transparent plate (glass plate, resin plate) that has a liquid crystal film and changes to opaque by application of voltage, such as light control glass. The effect control device 70 can change the transparent plate to an opaque state by applying a voltage.

  In the above description, the concealment members 653a to 653e and 670 conceal the counter value display unit 3a (and thus the displayed counter value (GBS)) of the image display device 3, but display the counter value of the G counter value display device 623. The part 623a may be concealed.

  Below, the effect of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. According to the third embodiment, the counter value display device (for example, the image display device 3) includes the display unit (for example, the counter value display unit 3a) that can display the counter value. The concealing means (concealing member) can conceal the display unit of the counter value display device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent annoying acts (so-called hyena acts) such as tricking around a slot machine (game machine) whose counter value is close to a predetermined value or searching for such a slot machine (game machine).

  According to the third embodiment, the slot machine (game machine) includes operation means (for example, operation units such as the effect button 10 and the max bet button 17) that can be operated by the player. The concealing unit (concealing member) conceals the display unit of the counter value display device based on the operation of the operation unit. Therefore, the player can hide the display unit of the counter value display device by operating the operation means, and can leave the slot machine for a break or the like without worrying about the so-called hyena action. Further, by concealing the display unit during the game, the player himself / herself does not know the counter value (the number of remaining games) up to a predetermined value, and can increase the interest of the game.

  According to the third embodiment, the concealing means can be manually operated by the player. Therefore, the player can easily operate the concealing means.

  According to the third embodiment, the concealing means includes a concealing member for concealing the display unit of the counter value display device. The concealing member can be disposed around the recessed chamber 660 in which the counter value display device (for example, the image display device 3) is accommodated when the display unit of the counter value display device is not concealed. Therefore, when the display unit of the counter value display device is not concealed, the concealment member can be arranged without a sense of incongruity.

  According to the third embodiment, the movable accessory 653 can move through the front of the counter value display device, and can move to a position in front of the counter value display device to conceal the counter value. Therefore, by concealing, the player does not know the counter value, and has expectation and anxiety. For this reason, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  According to the third embodiment, the movable accessory 653 hides the counter value when the counter value enters a predetermined range around the predetermined value. Therefore, the player can have more expectation and anxiety, and can further enhance the interest of the game.

  According to the third embodiment, the movable accessory 653 hides the counter value according to the result of a predetermined game as an effect. Therefore, the player can easily enjoy a predetermined game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the third embodiment, the movable accessory 653 is translucent or opaque. Therefore, the movable accessory 653 can appropriately hide the counter value.

(Fourth embodiment)
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth embodiment relates to the arrangement of the reels 6 (6a, 6b, 6c). The whole of the plurality of reels 6a, 6b, 6c is called a main reel. In the second embodiment, the reel 6 (main reel) is arranged at a conspicuous position on the front surface of the slot machine 610. However, in the slot machine 730 of the fourth embodiment, the player can play the image display device 3 during a normal game. The reel 6 is arranged in an inconspicuous position so that it can concentrate on the production. The configuration that is not particularly described below may be the same as that of the second embodiment or the third embodiment.

  119 (A) is a schematic front view of the slot machine 730, and FIG. 119 (B) is a horizontal sectional view of the recessed chamber 660 of the slot machine 730. In the slot machine 730 of the fourth embodiment, the concave chamber 660 occupies a large area immediately above the inclined base part 14, and the operation part (the effect button switch 10a, the Max bet button 17, the start lever 21, the reel stop button 24, etc.). It is formed at a position adjacent (opposite).

  The image display device 3 is disposed in the bottom 661 of the concave chamber 660 and is accommodated in the concave chamber 660. The image display device 3 is a large display device having a large screen, for example, a liquid crystal display panel. On the other hand, the small reel 6 (main reel) is provided on the side wall portion of the recessed chamber 660 as an inconspicuous position. Here, the reel 6 is provided on the right side wall 660b, but may be provided on the left side wall 660a. The reel 6 may be provided on the decorative panel unit 25 constituting the lower region of the slot machine 730 as another inconspicuous position, or the upper surface of the inclined base portion 14 on which the effect button 10 and the max bet button 17 are arranged. May be provided.

  The image display device 3 functions as an effect display device and can display an effect display associated with a variable display game (variable display game) facing the front. The effect display includes a moving image or a still image for effect displayed in accordance with the variable display game. The effect display may display a variation display corresponding to the variation (rotation) of the reel 6 as a moving image.

  FIG. 120A illustrates the display contents of the image display device 3. The image display device 3 looks at the reel 6 when it is necessary to align the symbol combination mode (symbol row) on the symbol formation line by pressing each reel stop button 24 at an appropriate timing (so-called eye pressing). Is displayed (notified) on the image display device 3. FIG. 120B shows a state where the player looks into the concave chamber 660 from the oblique lateral direction and looks at the reel 6 when pushing. The case where it is necessary to win is, for example, a case where a bonus winning or a small bonus winning is won by an internal lottery.

  FIG. 121 shows a slot machine 730 in the case of having a rotating member 733 as the movable accessory 653 (FIG. 85). 121 (A)-(C) are schematic partial front views of the slot machine 730, and FIGS. 121 (D)-(F) are schematic horizontal sectional views of the slot machine 730. FIG. 121 (A) respectively. -It corresponds to the II cross section of (C).

  The rotating member 733 is provided with a reel 6. The rotating member 733 is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft 733a on the side wall portion (here, the right side wall portion 660b) of the concave chamber 660 so as to be rotatable. The slot machine 730 may include a drive mechanism (consisting of a motor, gears, or the like) for rotating (rotating) the rotating member 733 according to a command from the effect control device 70. When it is necessary to push the eyes, the effect control device 70 controls the rotating member 733 to rotate. The rotation member 733 may be configured to be manually rotatable.

  The rotating member 733 passes from the initial position in FIGS. 121 (A) and 121 (D) through the intermediate position in FIGS. 121 (B) and 121 (E) to the rotating position (front position, FIG. 121C and FIG. 121F). Rotate to the final position. 121 (C) and 121 (F), the reel 6 provided on the rotating member 733 is directed forward on the player side, and the reel 6 is moved to a position that is easy for the player to see.

  FIG. 122 shows another example of the slot machine 730 having the rotating member 733 as the movable accessory 653 (FIG. 85). 122 (A)-(C) are schematic partial front views of the slot machine 730, and FIGS. 122 (D)-(F) are schematic vertical sectional views of the slot machine 730. FIG. 122 (A) respectively. -It corresponds to the II-II cross section of (C).

  The rotating member 733 in FIG. 122 has the same configuration as that of the rotating member 733 in FIG. 120 except that the rotating member 733 is pivotally supported on the upper wall portion 660c of the concave chamber 660 by the rotating shaft 733a. The rotating member 733 passes from the initial position in FIGS. 122 (A) and 122 (D) through the intermediate position in FIGS. 122 (B) and 122 (E) to the rotating position (front position) in FIGS. 122 (C) and (F). Rotate until 122 (C) and 122 (F), the reel 6 provided on the rotating member 733 faces the front side on the player side, and the entire reel 6 has moved to a position that is easy for the player to see.

  FIG. 123 shows the slot machine 730 in the case of having a rotating member 735 (movable mirror member) as the movable accessory 653 (FIG. 85). 123 (A)-(C) are schematic partial front views of the slot machine 730, and FIGS. 123 (D)-(F) are schematic horizontal sectional views of the slot machine 730. FIG. 123 (A) respectively. -It corresponds to the II cross section of (C).

  The rotating member 735 is not provided with the reel 6, and the reel 6 is provided on the right side wall 660 b of the concave chamber 660 as in FIG. 119. The rotation member 735 is pivotally supported on the left wall 660a of the concave chamber 660 by a rotation shaft 735a. The slot machine 730 may have a drive mechanism (consisting of a motor, gears, or the like) for rotating (rotating) the rotating member 735 according to a command from the effect control device 70. When it is necessary to push the eyes, the effect control device 70 controls the rotating member 735 to rotate. The rotation member 735 may be configured to be manually rotatable.

  The rotating member 735 is a mirror member (mirror member) that reflects light on the right surface, and a reflective film or the like is provided on the right surface. The rotating member 735 passes from the initial position in FIGS. 123 (A) and 123 (D) through the intermediate position in FIGS. 123 (B) and 123 (E) and rotates in the rotating position (rotated 45 degrees in FIGS. 123 (C) and (F). Rotate to position, final position). 120 (C) and 120 (F), the rotating member 735 (mirror member) reflects light from the reel 6 at the position facing in the lateral direction by 90 degrees and emits the light forward as an optical image. . That is, the player can visually recognize the reel 6 reflected on the rotation member 735 (mirror member) at the rotation position from the front on the player side.

  FIG. 124 shows a slot machine 730 having a CCD camera 737. FIG. 123A is a schematic partial front view of the slot machine 730, and FIG. 124B is a schematic horizontal cross-sectional view of the slot machine 730, which corresponds to the II cross section of FIG. 124A.

  The CCD camera 737 functions as a reel image acquisition unit that captures images of the reels 6 at positions facing each other in the horizontal direction and acquires images of the reels 6. When it is necessary to push the screen, the effect control device 70 acquires the video signal from the CCD camera 737 and displays the video on the reel 6 on the image display device 3. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the video of the variable display of the reel 6 acquired by the CCD camera 737 and displayed on the image display device 3 from the front when it is necessary to push the eye.

  Below, the effect of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. According to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine (game machine) executes a variable display game in which the reel 6 (main reel) capable of variable display of a plurality of identification information is rotated (rotated) based on the player's operation. Control means (for example, an effect control device 70 and / or a game control device 50) is provided that gives a profit to the player when the result of stopping the variable display game corresponds to winning. The concave chamber 660 is formed at a position adjacent to an operation unit (such as the start lever 21 and the reel stop button 24) that can be operated by the player. The effect display device (for example, the image display device 3) is accommodated in the concave chamber 660 and can display the effect display accompanying the variable display game facing the front. The reel 6 is provided on the wall of the concave chamber 660. Therefore, since the reel 6 is not conspicuous, it is possible to concentrate on the effect display during a normal game that does not require much pressing. Further, since the area near the operation unit such as the start lever 21 and the reel stop button 24 can be used as a space for a large effect display device, various expressions can be made in the effect display device, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

  According to the fourth embodiment, the control means (for example, the effect control device 70) can move the entire reel 6 (main reel). Therefore, when a so-called eye-opening is necessary for the reel, the main reel moves as a whole so that the player can easily make an eye-opening.

(Fifth embodiment)
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the fifth embodiment, a plurality of operation order display units 620a, 620b, and 620c of the operation order display device 620 in the second embodiment can be operated as movable objects, respectively. (A liquid crystal display panel, a sub display device).

  A plurality of operation order display sections 620a, 620b, and 620c are provided corresponding to the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c of the main reel, respectively. Each operation order display unit 620a, 620b, 620c (each display device) can move (operate) toward the corresponding reel when the reel stop button 24 is operated. In addition, each operation order display section 620a, 620b, 620c (each display device) may move when the corresponding reel is about to stop or after the stop.

  As shown in FIG. 125A, normally, the plurality of operation order display units 620a, 620b, and 620c of the operation order display device 620 are in the initial positions. As shown in FIG. 125 (B), the effect control device 70 displays the operation order (push order) of the reel stop buttons 24 on the operation order display device 620, particularly during the ART state (specific game state), and each operation. The sequential display units 620a, 620b, and 620c (each display device) may be moved (operated) to an operation position below the initial position. Such movement may be performed in a gaming state other than the ART state (such as a normal gaming state). Each operation order display unit 620a, 620b, 620c (each display device) may be moved (operated) to an operation position below the initial position.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 126 (A)-(E), when the actual operation order of the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c by the player is correct, the correct operation order is changed to the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c. The corresponding operation order display units 620a, 620b, and 620c may be moved downward (downward movement) in order and a predetermined image may be displayed instead of the operation order display. In FIG. 126E, the images displayed on the plurality of operation order display portions 620a, 620b, and 620c are combined to complete one picture (figure, pattern). Next, in FIG. 126 (F), the benefits (the number of additional games of ART, the number of ART games (total number of games), the subtraction value of GBS, the number of medals acquired, etc.) when winning combinations are all established in the correct order of operation are shown. Is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 126 (G), when the actual operation order of the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c by the player is in the middle, the operation order display units 620a, 620b, 620c are lowered, You may display the image (x mark etc.) which suggests a mistake. In addition, you may display the image (x mark etc.) which suggests an error not in the middle but in the state of FIG. 126 (F) after completion | finish of a descent | fall of all the operation order display parts.

  Below, the effect of 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. According to the fifth embodiment, the slot machine (game machine) includes a main reel including a plurality of reels 6a, 6b, and 6c in which a plurality of pieces of identification information can be variably displayed. A plurality of display devices (operation order display units 620a, 620b, 620c) respectively corresponding to the reels of the main reel are provided. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the display of the plurality of display devices.

  According to the fifth embodiment, since each display device can operate in correspondence with each reel 6a, 6b, 6c, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  According to the fifth embodiment, the plurality of display devices (operation order display units 620a, 620b, 620c) are configured to have a plurality of operation units (reel stop buttons 24a, The operation order of 24b and 24c) can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by favoring the player during the specific game state.

  According to the fifth embodiment, the plurality of display devices (operation order display units 620a, 620b, 620c) can operate in accordance with the operation order of the plurality of operation units (reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c). Therefore, it is possible to notify a plurality of display devices when the player's operation order is wrong or irregular operation, or to move the player when the player's operation order is correct.

(Other embodiments)
As shown in FIG. 127, instead of FIG. 110 of the third embodiment, the image display device 3 may be a movable slot machine 760. The effect control device 70 controls the image display device 3 to move through the drive mechanism. In the slot machine 760, the image display device 3 is not accommodated in the concave chamber. The image display device 3 in the initial position as shown in FIG. 127 (A) moves downward and overlaps the reel 6 as shown in FIG. 127 (B). In FIG. 127 (B), the counter value (GBS) is not displayed on the counter value display portion 3a. In FIG. 127C, when the image display device 3 returns to the initial position, the image display device 3 redisplays the counter value (GBS). The effect control device 70 may control the image display device 3 to move when the counter value (GBS) of the game number counter is subtracted in the GBS subtraction process (FIGS. 102A and 102B). When returning to the position, the subtracted counter value (GBS) may be displayed again.

  The slot machine of the present invention is not limited to the slot machine using medals as shown in the above embodiment. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines such as a slot machine using a game ball and a pachinko machine having a reel. The configurations of the above-described embodiments can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3 Main display (production display device, image display device)
4 Speaker 6 Reel 10 Production button 15 Medal insertion slot 16 Payout notification lamp 20 Payout button 21 Start lever 22 Return button 24 Reel stop button 28 Medal payout exit 30 Operation input unit 50 Game control device (main control device)
52 Start lever switch 58 Payout button switch 63 Medal payout device (hopper)
70 Production control device (sub control device)
90 medal path mechanism section 93 flow path switching mechanism (medal selector, medal sorting section)
94 Recovery rail 310 Sub-display 320 High probability mode display 330 Low probability mode display 340 First expectation display unit 350 Second expectation display unit 360 Left movable effect device 361 Left movable member 370 Right movable effect device 371 Right movable Member 600 Fluctuation display device 620 Operation order display device 623 G counter value display device 643 Recess 653 Movable accessory (concealment member)
660 concave chamber 922 medal insertion detector 925 medal intake detector 931 return port 932 flow path switching member 933 upper guide part 938 state conversion solenoid 939 medal flow path

Claims (2)

Conducting an internal lottery of award auditors on the basis of the start operation, including the bet number set to start the game to change display a plurality of reels, of the role that the outcome has been internally won the plurality of reels has been stopped on the basis of the stop operation In a gaming machine capable of executing a grant process for giving a game value when it becomes a stop-out that establishes a prize,
Storage means capable of storing game media within a prescribed number of ranges;
In response to execution of the application treatment, and a notification effect means capable of implementing the predetermined notification effect that can be recognized that the winning has been established,
The grant process includes a payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the game value from a payout outlet, and a storage process for storing the number of game media corresponding to the game value in the storage means,
The combination includes a first combination, a second combination having a shorter execution period of the payout process or the storage process than the first combination, and a re-playing combination.
In response to the start of the game, it is in a return state to return the game medium inserted from the slot,
In either of the end of the game and the end of the automatic bet number setting corresponding to the winning of the re-playing role, it is in a take-in state in which the game medium inserted from the insertion port is taken into the inside,
The notification production means is
The end timing of the notification effect in the case where the base point end timing of the payout process or the storing process, the initiated in response to the payout process or the storing process corresponding to the winning of the second roles of the notification effect An end timing is ended relatively later than an end timing of the notification effect started in response to the payout process or the storage process corresponding to the winning of the first combination , and the capture is performed from the return state. game machine and wherein the Rukoto is terminated on or after serving as a state. It is equipped with continuous production means that can execute a continuous production that produces multiple games,
When the start operation is executed by the player after the stop operation in the final effect in the final effect of the continuous effect, the continuous effect means ends the specific notification effect that can grasp the result of the continuous effect. Can be controlled to end the final production,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification effect can be executed overlapping with the notification effect corresponding to the second combination.